Siemens S42 Instruction manual

Square D® SEPAM™ Digital
Relay Catalog
Square D
Electrical
Protection
And
Monitoring
HAZARD CATEGORIES AND SPECIAL SYMBOLS
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service
or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout
this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call
attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label
indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION, used without the safety alert symbol, indicates a
potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in
property damage.
Note: Provides additional information to clarify or simplify a procedure.
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and
maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed
by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of
this material.
FCC NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense. This Class A digital
apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Sepam™ Series 20
Sepam™ Series 40
Sepam™ Series 80
General Content
Introduction
1
Sepam™ Series 20 and Sepam™ Series 40
2
Sepam™ Series 80
3
Additional Modules and Accessories
4
Ordering Sepam Relays
5
1
2
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 80
Introduction
Sepam for Greater Simplicity
4
Sepam Network Protection for Your Peace of Mind
5
Sepam Offers Flexibility to Match Your Needs
6
Sepam Boosts Productivity
7
Overview of Sepam Applications
8
Selection Guide for All Applications
9
Substation Applications
10
Feeder Protection
Main Protection
11
12
Bus Applications
13
Transformer Applications
14
Transformer Feeder Protection
Transformer Main Protection
15
17
Motor Applications
20
Generator Applications
24
Capacitor Applications
28
Communication Networks and Protocols
30
Implementation
32
Examples of Architectures
33
Available Sepam Data
36
Selection Table
Description
36
37
Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 80
Additional Modules and Accessories
Ordering Sepam Relays
0
41
77
129
195
3
Introduction
PE50478
A consistent range of protection relays
The Sepam range of protection relays is designed for all protection applications on
medium-voltage commercial and industrial distribution networks.
There are three series of relays:
b Sepam Series 20 for common applications
b Sepam Series 40 for demanding applications
b Sepam Series 80 for custom applications
PE50539
Sepam, a consistent range of protection relays.
A multi-functional range of digital relays
Each Sepam series offers all the functions required for the intended application:
b effective protection of life and property
b accurate measurements and detailed diagnosis
b integral equipment control
b local or remote indications and operation
Integral equipment control by Sepam.
PE50480
1
Sepam for Greater Simplicity
A Sepam solution for every application
For each electrotechnical application, Sepam offers the relay suited to the protection
needs of your electrical network.
The Sepam range covers the following applications:
b substations (main or feeder type)
b transformers
b motors
b generators
b buses
b capacitors
A Sepam solution for every application.
4
Introduction
Sepam Network Protection
for Your Peace of Mind
PE50528
Schneider Electric’s global product line
World leader in Power & Control
The future will call increasingly on electricity with growing needs for new modes
of production and new applications. The world leader in electric distribution and
automation & control, Schneider Electric makes electricity safe, as well as facilitating
and improving its use.
World-wide presence
Schneider Electric, by your side in over 130 countries.
With sites on every continent, Schneider Electric contributes to customer performance
through its unique selection of products, solutions and services, as well as its dynamic
policy of innovation.
Continuous, worldwide availability
With over 5000 points of sale in 130 countries, you can be sure to find the range of
products that meets your needs and complies perfectly with local standards.
Schneider Electric’s manufacturing of
protection relays
Sepam, over 25 years of experience
Schneider Electric broke new ground in 1982 by marketing the first multi-functional
digital protection relay, the Sepam 10.
Today, with the Sepam range, you benefit from more than 25 years of experience on
the part of our R&D teams.
Installed base
b 200,000 Sepam relays in over 90 countries
b presence in every sector of activity:
v energy: production and distribution
v infrastructures: airports, tunnels, public transport, water treatment
v industry: automobiles, mines, semi-conductors, metallurgy, petrochemicals
v commercial sector: shopping centers, hospitals.
Sepam’s guaranteed quality
DE51862
DE51861
Protection relays must be totally reliable. That level of reliability is obtained by total
quality at every step, from design through operation.
b design based on dependability studies and complying with the functional
requirements of standard IEC 61508
b development and production certified ISO 9001
b environment-friendly production, certified ISO 14001
b service quality ensured by decentralized logistics and support
b compliance with international standards and local certification
b compliance with applicable ANSI C37 standard, UL 508 standard, CSA C22
standard
DE51860
PE50529
Technical assistance around the globe
Our technicians are always on hand to provide solutions tailored to your needs.
Schneider Electric provides all the technical assistance you require, wherever you
may be. Visit the www.powerlogic.com site to find contact information about Schneider
Electric in your country.
5
1
Introduction
Sepam Offers Flexibility to Meet
Your Needs
Enhancement through the addition of
optional modules to keep pace with your everchanging installation
1
1
Base unit
2
Parameter and protection settings saved on
removable memory cartridge
3
42 logic inputs and 23 relay outputs with
3 optional modules
4
Connection to communication networks
5
Temperature sensors
6
Low-level analog output
7
Synchro-check module
8
Software tools
PE50483
To adapt to as many situations as possible and allow for future installation upgrades,
optional modules may be added to Sepam at any time for new functions:
b plug & play modules, easy to install and connect
b complete setup using software
Sepam Series 80 and its optional modules.
A choice of user-machine interfaces (UMI) to
meet your operating needs
PE50041
b advanced UMI for all Sepam relays:
v on front panel
v or remote UMI installed in the most convenient location for the facility manager
b mimic-based UMI for Sepam series 80, offering local switchgear control
A software tool for all Sepam relays
The SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam Series 20, Series 40
and Series 80.
b the ergonomics are designed to guide you in setting up Sepam
b future compatibility is ensured with all Sepam versions.
SFT2841: a single software tool for all Sepam relays.
6
Introduction
Sepam Boosts Productivity
Easy operation
1
To ensure fast and effective servicing, thereby reducing the operating and
maintenance costs of your electric installation, all operating and maintenance
information is available:
b locally and remotely
b in your language
PE50127
Local operation
All the data required for local equipment operation are clearly displayed on the LCD
screen of the UMI (User-Machine Interface).
b UMI screens are shipped with English as the default, but can be translated to your
language
b alarms and operating messages can be personalized
Customized advanced UMI.
PE50765
Remote operation
All Sepam relays can be connected to two types of communication networks:
b an S-LAN (supervisory local area network) to remotely control and monitor
Sepam relays connected to a supervisory system (SCADA or RTU)
b an E-LAN (engineering local area network), reserved for Sepam remote
parameter setting and centralized installation diagnosis using the SFT2841 software.
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam connection to two communication networks.
Improved continuity of service
PE50637
With Sepam, all data is available for optimum management and use of the electric
installation.
b The clear and complete information supplied by Sepam following a fault trip
enables the operator to restore power as quickly as possible.
b Preventive maintenance of switchgear is made easier by the diagnosis functions
provided by Sepam.
b The predictive information supplied by the motor-protection functions optimizes
process control.
Reduced maintenance costs
The Sepam range is designed to reduce maintenance time and cost for your protection
system.
b Sepam modules and connectors may be removed.
b The optional modules are the same for the entire Sepam range, thus reducing the
stock of replacement parts.
b Sepam series 80 has a removable memory cartridge to simplify maintenance
operations.
Sepam series 80 memory cartridge.
7
PE50465
The selection guide proposes
Sepam Series 20
For applications
the Sepam types suited to your
Characteristics
b 10 logic inputs
protection needs, based on the
b 8 relay outputs
b 1 communication port
characteristics of your application.
b 8 temperature-sensor
NO
DE51732
PE50465
For demanding applications
Characteristics
b 10 logic inputs
b 8 relay outputs
b logical equation editor
b 1 communication port
b 16 temperature-sensor
inputs
NO
DE51734
NO
NO
M
DE51735
For custom applications
Characteristics
b 42 logic inputs
b 23 relay outputs
b logical equation editor
b 2 communication ports
for multi-master or
redundant architectures
b 16 temperature-sensor
inputs
b removable memory
cartridge with parameter
and protection settings
for fast return to service
following replacement
b battery backup to
save historical and
disturbance-recording
data
b mimic-based UMI for
local device control
b optional Logipam
programming software
to program specific
functions
DE51733
Sepam Series 80
The list of functions is given for
information purposes.
Grounding, whether direct or via
an impedance, is represented
by the same pictogram, i.e. the
pictogram corresponding to a
direct connection.
NO
Sepam Series 40
PE50463
The most typical applications are
presented with the corresponding
Sepam and each application
example is described by:
a single-line diagram
indicating:
equipment to be protected
network configuration
position of measurement
sensors
standard and specific Sepam
functions to be implemented
to protect the application.
DE51731
inputs
PE50464
NO
NO
NO
DE51736
1
Overview of Sepam Applications
DE51730
Selection Guide for All
Applications
8
NO
Selection Guide for All
Applications
Selection Guide for All Applications
Protection Functions
Applications
Basic
Substation
Specific
current protection
Breaker failure
Bus
Transformer
Motor
S20
T20
M20
S23
T23
Generator
Capacitor
1
B21
voltage and
frequency protection
B22
disconnection by
“rate of change of
frequency”
S40
current, voltage and
frequency protection
directional ground
fault
S41
directional ground
fault and phase
overcurrent
S42
Page
41
T40
G40
M41
T42
current, voltage and
frequency protection
S80
B80
directional ground
fault
directional ground
fault and phase
overcurrent
disconnection by
“rate of change of
frequency”
current, voltage and transformer and
frequency protection transformermachine unit
differential
S81
T81
S82
T82
M81
G82
S84
T87
machine differential
M88
G88
M87
G87
Page
77
B83
current, voltage and voltage and
frequency protection frequency protection
for two sets of bus
C86
current, voltage and capacitor-bank
frequency protection unbalance
Page 10
Page 12
Page 14
Page 20
Page 24
Page 28
9
Selection Guide for
All Applications
ANSI code
S20
S23
S40
S41
S42
S80
S81
S82
S84
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
67
67N/67NC
32P
37P
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
81R
79
25
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
v
v
B22
2
1
2/1 (4)
2
2
1
2
1
v
v
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
v
v
standard options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules.
(3) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(4) 2 undervoltage (LL) and 1 undervoltage (Ln).
(5) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for each protection function.
Feeder Protection
b feeder short-circuit and overload protection.
NO
DE51686
DE52581
Protection of low-capacitance feeders in impedance grounded or solidly
grounded neutral systems: Sepam S20, S23, S40 or S80
b no voltage and frequency monitoring.
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
NO
Protection of high-capacitance feeders in impedance grounded or
compensated or isolated neutral systems: Sepam S41 or S81
b specific feeder protection: 67N/67NC.
DE51687
1
Protection Functions
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload for cables
Directional phase overcurrent (1)
Directional ground fault (1)
Directional active overpower
Directional active underpower
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
Recloser (4 shots) (2)
Synchro-check (3)
Substation Applications
Feeder Protection
10
NO
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Substation Applications
Main Protection
Main Protection
b bus short-circuit protection.
NO
1
Protection of 2 mains: Sepam S80
b with automatic source transfer (ATS) and synchrocheck (ANSI 25).
DE51690
b line voltage and
frequency monitoring.
DE51689
DE51688
DE52582
Main protection: Sepam S20, S23, S40 or S80
b no voltage and
b bus voltage and
frequency monitoring.
frequency monitoring.
NO
NC
NO
NC
NO
NO
DE51692
NO
NO
NO
NO
DE51694
Protection of any main or tie breaker circuit breaker with load shedding
based on frequency variations: Sepam S84
b load-shedding-specific functions: 81L, 81R.
DE51693
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Ring-main protection: Sepam S42 or S82
b line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC
b directional Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI).
DE51695
DE51691
b specific line or source protection: 67, 67N/67NC.
Parallel-main protection with disconnection function: Sepam S20 + B22 or
Sepam S84
b disconnection-specific functions:
b disconnection-specific functions:
27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R.
27,59, 59N, 81L, 81R, 32P, 37P.
DE52583
Parallel main protection: Sepam S42 or S82
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
11
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Bus Applications
Protection Functions
1
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
Synchro-check (2)
ANSI code
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
81R
25
B21
B22
2
1
2/1 (3)
2
2
2
1
2/1 (3)
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
B80
B83
8
8
8
8
1
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
1
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(3) 2 undervoltage (LL) and 1 undervoltage (Ln).
(4) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for
each protection function.
12
Bus Applications
Voltage Monitoring
DE51723
DE51722
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on buses:
Sepam B21 or B22
b load-shedding-specific function: 81L.
b load-shedding-specific functions: 81L,
81R.
Tie Breaker Circuit-Breaker Protection
DE51696
b bus short-circuit protection
b voltage and frequency monitoring.
Monitoring of the 3 phase voltages and the residual voltage on 2 buses:
Sepam B83
NO
NO
NO
Main Protection with Additional Bus Voltage Monitoring
b bus short-circuit protection
b line voltage and frequency monitoring.
Additional bus voltage monitoring: Sepam B80
DE51697
Selection Guide for
All Applications
NO
13
1
Selection Guide for
All Applications
1
Standard transformer application diagrams
do not take voltage levels into account:
b the transformer primary winding is always
at the top
b the transformer secondary winding is
always at the bottom.
b the transformer primary and secondary
windings need to be protected.
b the Sepam relay can be installed on either
the primary or secondary winding of the
transformer.
b the other winding can be protected by a
main or feeder type substation application.
Transformer Applications
Protection Functions ANSI
code
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence /
unbalance
Thermal overload for
machines (1)
Restricted ground fault
differential
Two-winding transformer
differential
Directional phase
overcurrent (1)
Directional ground fault (1)
Directional active
overpower
Overexcitation (V / Hz)
Positive sequence
undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage
displacement
Negative sequence
overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Thermostat / Buchholz (2)
Temperature monitoring
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4)
T20
T23
T40
T42
T81
T82
T87
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
49RMS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
64REF
87T
1
67
2
67N/67NC
32P
2
24
27D
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
27R
27
59
59N
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
47
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
v
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
v
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
v
81H
81L
26/63
38/49T
25
2
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
8
8
16
RTDs RTDs RTDs
standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules.
(3) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(5) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for
each protection function.
14
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Transformer Applications
Transformer Feeder Protection
Transformer Feeder Protection
NO
NO
DE52585
DE52584
b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T).
Transformer feeder protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam T20, T23
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G.
b neutral point: 50G/51G.
1
NO
NO
DE51698
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam T40 or T81
Ground fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G.
NO
NO
Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.
15
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Transformer Applications
Transformer Feeder Protection
DE51699
1
NO
DE51700
Transformer feeder protection with voltage monitoring and additional
current measurement: Sepam T81
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G
b primary: 50G/51G
b tank ground leakage:
b secondary: 50G/51G.
50G/51G.
NO
NO
NO
Note: for long feeders, the 50G/51G function may be replaced by the 67N/67NC.
NO
DE51703
NO
DE51702
DE51701
Transformer feeder differential protection: Sepam T87
Transformer differential protection: 87T
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G.
b primary: 50G/51G
b primary:
b secondary:
v 64REF
v 64REF
v 50G/51G
v 50G/51G.
b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
NO
Δ
NO
16
NO
Y
Y
NO
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Transformer Applications
Transformer Main Protection
Transformer Main Protection
1
b transformer short-circuit and overload protection
b internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63)
b RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 49T).
NO
DE52587
DE52586
Transformer main protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam T20, T23
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b secondary: 50G/51G.
b neutral point: 50G/51G.
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
DE51705
DE51704
Transformer main protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam T40 or T81
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b secondary: 50G/51G.
b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
NO
NO
17
Selection Guide for
All Applications
NO
Ground fault protection:
b primary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G
b secondary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
DE51711
NO
Ground fault protection:
b primary:
v 64REF
v 50G/51G
b secondary: 50G/51G.
DE51710
NO
DE51709
NO
DE51708
Transformer main differential protection: Sepam T87
Transformer differential protection: 87T
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b primary: 50G/51G
b primary: 50G/51G
b primary: 50G/51G
b secondary: 50G/51G.
b secondary:
b secondary:
v 64REF
v 64REF
v 50G/51G.
v 50G/51G.
NO
Δ
NO
NO
NO
NO
Y
Y
NO
Protection of 2 non-coupled transformer mains: Sepam T81
b automatic source transfer (ATS)
b synchro-check (ANSI 25).
DE51706
DE51707
1
Transformer Applications
Transformer Main Protection
18
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Transformer Applications
Transformer Main Protection
DE51712
Parallel transformer main protection: Sepam T42 or T82
b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67
b transformer secondary ground fault protection: 50G/51G, 59N.
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
DE51718
b transformer directional phase overcurrent protection: 67
b transformer secondary ground fault protection: 67N/67NC, 64REF
b with synchro-check (ANSI 25).
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
DE51713
Parallel main differential protection: Sepam T87
b transformer differential protection: 87T
b directional transformer protection: 67
b transformer secondary ground fault protection: 50G/51G, 67N/67NC 64REF.
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
19
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Motor Applications
Protection Functions
1
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload for machines (1)
Two-winding transformer
differential
Machine differential
Directional ground fault (1)
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive overpower
Field loss (underimpedance)
Phase undercurrent
Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
Starts per hour
Loss of synchronization
Overspeed (2 set points) (2)
Underspeed (2 set points) (2)
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Thermostat / Buchholz
Temperature monitoring
(16 RTDs) (3)
ANSI
code
M20
M41
M81
M87
M88
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
87T
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
87M
67N/67NC
32P
32Q/40
40
37
48/51LR/14
66
78PS
12
14
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
26/63
38/49T
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
v
v
1
1
v
v
1
1
v
v
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
16
RTDs
v
8
RTDs
v
16
RTDs
v
16
RTDs
standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules.
(3) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(4) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for
each protection function.
20
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Motor Applications
Motor Protection
b
b
b
b
1
internal motor fault protection
power supply fault protection
driven load fault protection
RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T).
NO
DE51738
NO
DE51737
DE51724
Motor protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20
b direct starting.
b auto-transformer
b two-way.
starting.
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
DE51740
NO
DE51739
DE51725
Motor protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41 or M81
b direct starting.
b auto-transformer
b two-way.
starting.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Motor differential protection: Sepam M87
Motor differential protection: 87M.
DE51743
NO
b auto-transformer
starting.
DE51742
DE51741
b direct starting.
Phase protection by
self-balancing-differential
scheme: 50/51.
b direct starting.
NO
NO
NO
NO
21
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Motor Applications
Motor-Transformer Unit Protection
b
b
b
b
b
1
motor and transformer protection against internal faults
power supply fault protection
driven load fault protection
internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63)
RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T).
Motor-transformer unit protection without voltage monitoring: Sepam M20
b transformer primary ground fault protection: 50G/51G.
DE51744
Note: monitoring of motor insulation must be ensured by another device.
NO
DE51745
Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage monitoring: Sepam M41
b motor ground fault protection: 59N
b transformer primary ground fault protection: 50G/51G.
NO
NO
22
DE51746
DE51747
Motor-transformer unit protection with voltage and transformer monitoring:
Sepam M81
b motor ground fault protection: 59N
b motor ground fault protection: 50G/51G
b transformer primary ground fault
b transformer primary ground fault
protection: 50G/51G
protection: 50G/51G
b transformer monitoring: Buchholz,
b transformer monitoring: Buchholz,
thermostat, temperature measurement.
thermostat, temperature measurement.
NO
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Motor Applications
NO
1
DE51749
DE51748
Motor-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam M88
Motor-transformer unit differential protection: 87T.
b motor ground fault protection: 50G/51G
b motor ground fault protection: 59N
b transformer primary ground fault
b transformer primary ground fault
protection: 50G/51G.
protection: 50G/51G.
NO
23
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Generator Applications
Protection Functions
1
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload for machines (1)
Restricted ground fault differential
Two-winding transformer
differential
Machine differential
Directional phase overcurrent (1)
Directional ground fault (1)
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive overpower
Directional active underpower
Field loss (underimpedance)
Loss of synchronization
Overspeed (2 set points) (2)
Underspeed (2 set points) (2)
Voltage-restrained phase
overcurrent
Underimpedance
Inadvertent energization
Third harmonic
undervoltage /
100% stator ground fault
Overexcitation (V / Hz)
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Thermostat / Buchholz
Temperature monitoring
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4)
ANSI
code
G40
G82
G87
G88
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
64REF
87T
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
87M
67
67N/67NC
32P
32Q/40
37P
40
78PS
12
14
50V/51V
1
1
1
21B
50/27
27TN/64G2
64G
24
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
26/63
38/49T
25
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
16 RTDs
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
v
v
1
1
v
v
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
16 RTDs
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
16 RTDs
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
16 RTDs
v
v
v
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
v
v
standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional input/output modules.
(3) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(5) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for each
protection function.
24
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Generator Applications
Generator Protection
b
b
b
b
b
1
internal generator fault protection
network fault protection
driving machine fault protection
RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T)
voltage and frequency monitoring.
DE51751
DE51750
Protection of a separate generator: Sepam G40
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b 50G/51G
b 50G/51G.
b 59N.
NO
NO
DE51754
DE51753
DE51752
Protection of a generator coupled to other generators or to a network:
Sepam G82
Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67.
Control fault protection.
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
Ground fault protection:
b 50G/51G
b 100 % stator ground fault b 64REF and 50G/51G
b 59N.
64G.
b 50N/51N.
NO
NO
NO
25
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Generator Applications
Ground fault protection:
b 50N/51N.
DE51758
DE51756
DE51755
1
DE51757
Generator Differential protection: Sepam G87
Phase protection by self-balancing differential scheme: Generator differential protection: 87M.
50/51.
Ground fault protection: 50G/51G.
Ground fault protection: Ground fault protection:
b 50G/51G
b 100 % stator ground
b 59N.
fault 64G.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Generator-Transformer Unit Protection
b
b
b
b
b
generator and transformer protection against internal faults
network fault protection
driving machine fault protection
RTD temperature monitoring (ANSI 38/49T)
voltage and frequency monitoring.
Separate generator-transformer unit protection. Sepam G40
Ground fault protection:
b 50G/51G.
DE51759
Note: monitoring of generator insulation must be ensured by another device.
NO
26
Generator Applications
DE51761
DE51760
Protection of a generator-transformer unit coupled to other generators or to
a network: Sepam G82
Short-circuit detection on generator side: 67.
Control fault protection.
Internal transformer protection: Thermostat / Buchholz (ANSI 26/63).
b generator ground fault protection:
b generator ground fault protection:
50G/51G
100 % stator ground fault 64G
b transformer secondary ground fault
b transformer secondary ground fault
protection:
protection:
v 50G/51G
v 50G/51G
v 59N.
v 59N.
NO
NO
NO
DE51763
Generator-transformer unit differential protection: Sepam G88
Generator-transformer unit differential protection: 87T.
b generator ground fault protection:
b generator ground fault protection:
50G/51G
100% stator ground fault 64G
b transformer secondary ground fault
b transformer secondary ground fault
protection:
protection:
v 50G/51G.
v 50G/51G
v 64REF.
DE51762
Selection Guide for
All Applications
NO
27
1
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Capacitor Applications
Protection Functions
1
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault /
Sensitive ground fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload for capacitors (1)
Capacitor-bank unbalance
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs) (2)
ANSI code
S20
S23
S40
C86
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
51C
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
38/49T
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
8
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
16
RTDs
2
2
2
1
2
4
standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with 2 groups of settings.
(2) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(3) The digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for
each protection function.
28
Selection Guide for
All Applications
Capacitor Applications
Capacitor Bank Protection
1
DE52588
Protection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) without voltage
monitoring: Sepam S20, S23
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection.
NO
DE51765
Protection of a capacitor bank (delta connection) with voltage monitoring:
Sepam S40 or C86
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection
b voltage and frequency monitoring
b overload protection: ANSI 49RMS (Sepam C86 only).
NO
DE51766
Protection of a double-wye connected capacitor bank with 1 to 4 steps:
Sepam C86
b capacitor bank short-circuit protection
b voltage and frequency monitoring
b specific overload protection, self-adapted to the number of connected steps
b unbalance protection: 51C.
NO
29
Communication Networks and
Protocols
Communication
Two Types of Communication Network
Sepam relays can be connected to two types of networks, thus providing access to
different types of information:
b a supervisory local area network or S-LAN
b an engineering local area network or E-LAN.
Examples of communication architectures are presented on pages 30 and 31.
Supervisory local area network (S-LAN)
DE53103
1
All Sepam relays communicate and can be
integrated into communication architecture.
All Sepam information can be accessed
remotely.
An S-LAN is used for supervision functions concerning the installation and the electric
network. It can be used to connect a set of communicating devices using the same
communication protocol to a centralized supervision system. Sepam can be connected
to an S-LAN using one of the following communication protocols:
b Modbus RTU
b Modbus TCP/IP
b DNP3
b IEC 60870-5-103
b IEC 61850
Engineering local area network (E-LAN)
An E-LAN is intended for Sepam parameter-setting and operating functions. It can be
used to connect a set of Sepam units to a PC running the SFT2841 software.
In this configuration, the operator has remote and centralized access to all Sepam
information, with no need to develop any special communication software. The
Sepam connection to two communication networks (S-LAN and
operator can easily:
E-LAN).
b set up the Sepam general parameters and functions
b collect all Sepam operating and diagnostics information
b manage the protection system for the electric network
b monitor the status of the electric network
b run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electric network.
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Communication Protocols
Modbus RTU
Modbus RTU is a data-transmission protocol, a de facto standard since 1979 widely
used in industry and accepted by many communicating devices. For more information
on the Modbus RTU protocol, visit www.modbus.org.
Modbus TCP/IP
The Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet communication protocol offers the same functions as
Modbus RTU as well as compatibility with multi-master architectures
DNP3
DNP3 is a data-transmission protocol specially suited to the needs of utilities for remote
control/monitoring of substations in the electric network. For more information on the
DNP3 protocol, visit www.dnp.org.
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an accompanying standard for the standards in the
IEC 60870-5 series. It defines communication between protection devices and the
various devices in a control system (supervisor or RTU) in a substation. For more
information on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.
IEC 61850
The standards in the IEC 61850 series define a protocol for communication in electrical
substations. This Ethernet-based protocol offers advanced characteristics and
interoperability between multi-vendor devices. The Sepam relay handles the station
bus, in compliance with standards IEC 61850-6, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4 and 8-1. For more
information on the IEC 61850 protocol, visit www.iec.ch.
30
Communication
Communication Networks and
Protocols
Other protocols
A gateway / protocol converter must be used to connect Sepam to a communication
network based on other protocols.
IEC 60870-5-101
The CN1000 gateway developed by EuroSystem enables Sepam connection to
IEC 60870-5-101 networks. This gateway is quick and simple to implement using
the supplied configuration software integrating all Sepam parameters. For more
information on the CN1000 gateway, visit www.euro-system.fr.
31
1
Communication
Implementation
A complete range of accessories
Sepam connects to a communication network via a communication interface.
Selection of the interface depends on the communication architecture:
b number of networks to be connected:
v 1 network, S-LAN or E-LAN
v 2 networks, S-LAN and E-LAN
b communication protocol selected for the S-LAN: Modbus RTU, DNP3,
IEC 60870-5-103 or IEC 61850
b network physical interface:
v 2-wire or 4-wire RS485
v Ethernet
v fiber optic, with wye or ring architecture.
Sepam communication interfaces are presented in detail on page 158.
Direct Sepam connection to the Ethernet network
PE80033-36
A complete range of Sepam communication interfaces
Sepam series 40 and Sepam series 80 units can be directly connected to the Ethernet
network via the ACE 850 communication interface. In this way they make full use of
Ethernet network performance and all IEC 61850 functions.
b Compatible communication protocols:
v Modbus TCP/IP
v IEC 61850
b Network physical interface:
v 10 baseT /100 base TX (wye architecture)
v 100 base FX (wye architecture).
Easy implementation
The communication interfaces are remote modules that are easy to install and connect.
The SFT2841 software is used for complete setup of the communication interfaces:
b protocol selection and setup of the functions specific to each protocol
b setup of the physical interface.
Advanced configuration of IEC 61850 protocol
The SFT850 software is used for advanced configuration of the IEC 61850 protocol for
both the ECI850 server and the ACE850 communication interface:
b complete Sepam-configuration database (.icd)
b processing of system-configuration files (.scd)
b creation and processing of ECI850 and ACE850 configuration files (.cid).
PE50161
1
PE50530
Sepam Communication Interfaces
Sepam IEC 61850 server
The entire Sepam range can be connected to an IEC 61850 system via the Sepam
ECI850 server, representing the most economical solution. The server also ensures
compatibility with the E-LAN network.
Ethernet Gateways in a Modbus Environment
Sepam can be connected to an Ethernet TCP/IP network in a totally transparent
manner via the EGX100 gateway or the EGX400 server.
EGX100 gateway
Access to Sepam information via a web browser.
The EGX100 offers access to enhanced communication and multi-master
architectures. It provides IP (Internet Protocol) connection for communication on all
types of networks, notably intranets and internet.
EGX400 server
In addition to Ethernet TCP/IP connection, the EGX400 offers a web server and HTML
pages designed specially to present the essential Sepam information. This information
may be accessed in clear text and at no risk on any PC connected to the intranet/
internet and equipped with a web browser.
32
Examples of Architectures
Communication
Seven typical communication architectures are presented in the examples below.
Each architecture is presented with:
b a simplified diagram
b the characteristics of the implemented networks.
The physical architecture of the communication networks and the connection
to networks depends on the type of network (RS485 or fiber optic) and the
communication interfaces used. Sepam communication interfaces are presented in
detail on page 158.
Example 1. Single S-LAN network
Physical medium
Modbus RTU
DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-103
Twisted-pair (2-wire or
4-wire RS485)
or fiber optic
DE53249
S-LAN characteristics
Protocol
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Example 2. Single E-LAN network
Modbus RTU
Twisted-pair (2-wire or
4-wire RS485)
or fiber optic
DE53250
E-LAN characteristics
Protocol
Physical medium
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam™
Series 80
Example 3. Parallel S-LAN and E-LAN networks
Physical medium
Modbus RTU
DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-103
2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair)
or fiber optic
DE53251
S-LAN characteristics
Protocol
E-LAN characteristics
Protocol
Physical medium
Modbus RTU
2-wire RS485 (twisted-pair)
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
33
1
Examples of Architectures
Communication
Protocol
Physical medium
Modbus RTU
Twisted-pair (2-wire or
4-wire RS485)
DE53106
Characteristics of Modbus network between
Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)
Characteristics of Ethernet network
Protocol
Physical medium
Functions of EGX100 or
EGX400 gateway
Modbus TCP/IP
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or
100 Base Fx
Modbus TCP / Modbus RTU
conversion
Multiplexing between S-LAN
and E-LAN networks
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Example 5. Two parallel S-LAN networks (Sepam series 80)
S-LAN characteristics
Protocol
Modbus RTU
DNP3
or IEC 60870-5-103
Physical medium
Twisted-pair (2-wire or
4-wire RS485)
or fiber optic
Note: the two communication ports on Sepam series 80 can
also be used to create two redundant S-LANs connected to a
single supervisor/RTU.
An E-LAN can be added to the two S-LANs.
DE53107
1
Example 4. S-LAN and E-LAN networks over Ethernet TCP/IP
Sepam™
Series 80
34
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam™
Series 80
Examples of Architectures
Communication
Example 6: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP
Protocol
Modbus RTU
Physical medium
Twisted-pair (2-wire or
4-wire RS485)
1
DE53104
Characteristics of Modbus network between
Sepam relays (S-LAN and E-LAN)
Characteristics of Ethernet network
Protocol
IEC 61850
Support physique
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx
Sepam ECI850 server
functions
Modbus RTU / IEC 61850
conversion
Multiplexing between S-LAN
and E-LAN networks
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Example 7: S-LAN over IEC 61850 and E-LAN over Ethernet TCP/IP (Sepam series 80)
IEC 61850
Physical medium
Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx or
100 Base Fx
DE53105
Characteristics of Ethernet network
Protocol
Note: for the best performance of the protection system
when involving peer-to-peer communication through GOOSE
messages, we strongly recommend :
b to use fiber-optic links
b to build a fault-tolerant backbone fiber-optic ring, as shown in
the example
b to use 61850 compatible managed switches.
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam™
Series 80
Sepam™
Series 80
35
Available Sepam Data
Selection Table
Communication
Modbus RTU
1
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61850 (ECI850)
Series 20 Series 40 Series 80 Series 20 Series 40 Series 80 Series 20 Series 40 Series 80 Series 20 Series 40 Series 80
Data transmitted from Sepam to the supervisor
Metering and diagnosis
Measurements
Energy
Network diagnosis
Machine diagnosis
Switchgear diagnosis
Sepam diagnosis
Logipam counters
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1)
(1)
b
(1)
(1)
b
(1)
(1)
b
b
b
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Remote indications
Alarms and internal status
conditions
Logic inputs
Logic outputs
Logic equations
Data transmitted from the supervisor to Sepam
b
Pulse-type remote-control
commands, in direct mode
b
Pulse-type remote-control
commands, in “Select Before
Operate” mode
Maintained remote-control
commands (for Logipam)
Remote control security
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Data accessible via special functions
Time-stamping
Time-stamped events
Unsolicited events
Time-setting and
synchronization
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
b
b
Remote setting
Selection of the protectionsetting group
Reading/writing of protection
settings
Reading of general
parameters
Reading/writing of analog
output (MSA141)
Network diagnosis
Transfer of disturbancerecording data
Tripping contexts
Out-of-sync context
b
b
b
Miscellaneous
Identification of Sepam
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Peer-to-peer data
Protection related
Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI)
Inter-tripping
Fast load-shedding
b
b
b
User-defined
Logipam contacts
* To or from the Sepam series 80, series 40 and series 20 units, depending on the case.
(1) Depending on the modelling of the IEC 61850 logic nodes.
36
b
Communication
Available Sepam Data
Description
Data Transmitted from Sepam to the
Supervisor
1
Metering and Diagnosis
The values measured by Sepam that may be remotely accessed are divided into the
following categories:
b measurements: currents, voltages, frequency, power, temperatures, etc.
b energy: calculated or pulse-type energy counters
b network diagnosis: phase displacement, tripping currents, unbalance ratio, etc.
b machine diagnosis: temperature rise, motor starting time, remaining operating time
before overload tripping, waiting time after tripping, etc.
b switchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time and number of
operations, circuit breaker charging time, etc.
b Sepam diagnosis: partial or major fault, etc.
b Logipam SFT2885 counters.
Remote Indications
The logic-state information that may be remote accessed is divided into the following
categories:
b alarms and internal status conditions
b status of logic inputs
b status of logic outputs
b status of nine LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b status of logic-equation output bits.
Alarms and internal status conditions
The alarms and internal status conditions are remote indications (TS) pre-assigned
to protection and control functions. Remote indications depend on the type of Sepam
application and can be re-assigned by Logipam. The remote indications that can be
accessed via the communication link include:
b all protection-function alarms
b monitoring-function alarms: CT or VT fault, control fault
b Sepam status data:
v Sepam not reset
v remote setting blocked, remote-control commands blocked
b status data on the following functions:
v recloser: in service / blocked, reclosing in progress / successful, permanent trip
v disturbance recording: records blocked / stored.
Data Transmitted from the Supervisor to
Sepam
Pulse-type remote-control commands
Pulse-type remote-control commands (TC) may be carried out in two modes (selected
by parameter setting):
b direct mode
b confirmed SBO (select before operate) mode.
Remote-control commands are reassigned to metering, protection and control functions
and depend on the type of Sepam. They are used for the following, in particular:
b to control breaking device opening and closing
b to reset Sepam and initialize maximum demand measurements
b to select the active group of settings by enabling group A or B
b to block or enable the following functions: recloser, thermal overload protection,
disturbance recording.
Remote-control commands can be re-assigned by Logipam.
Remote-control security
Transmission of Sepam series 80 remote controls and settings over a Modbus
S-LAN can be password protected.
37
Communication
Available Sepam Data
Description
IEC 61850 logical nodes
Sepam supports IEC 61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that
the actual instantiation of each logical node depends on the application.
1
Nodes
Sepam
Series 20
Sepam
Series 20
Bus
Others
Sepam
Series 40
Sepam
Series 80
L: system logical nodes
LPHD
Physical device information
b
b
b
b
LLN0
Logical node zero
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
P: logical nodes for protection functions
PDIF
Differential
PDOP
Directional overpower
PDUP
Directional underpower
PFRC
Rate of change of frequency
PHIZ
Ground detector
b
b
b
b
PMRI
Motor restart blocking
b
b
b
PMSS
Motor starting time supervision
b
b
b
PSDE
Sensitive directional ground fault
b
b
PTOC
Time overcurrent
b
b
b
PTOF
Overfrequency
b
b
b
PTOV
Overvoltage
b
b
b
PTRC
Protection trip conditioning
b
b
b
PTTR
Thermal overload
b
b
b
b
PTUC
Undercurrent
PTUV
Undervoltage
b
PTUF
Underfrequency
b
PVOC
Voltage controlled time overcurrent
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
PVPH
Volts per Hz
b
PZSU
Zero speed or underspeed
b
R: logical nodes for protection related functions
RBRF
Breaker failure
b
b
b
RREC
Autoreclosing
b
b
b
RSYN
Synchronism-check or synchronizing
b
C: logical nodes for control
CSWI
Switch controller
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
GG: logical nodes for generic references
GGIO
Generic process I/O
M : logical nodes for metering and measurement
b
MHAI
Harmonics or interharmonics
MMTR
Metering
b
b
b
b
MMXU
Measurement
b
b
b
b
MSQI
Sequence and imbalance
b
b
b
MSTA
Metering statistics
b
b
b
b
b
b
X: logical nodes for switchgear
XCBR
Circuit breaker
b
Z: logical nodes for further power system equipment
ZCAP
38
Capacitor bank
b
Communication
Available Sepam Data
Description
IEC 61850 GOOSE messages
GOOSE messages allows peer-to-peer communication between protection devices in
a standardized way. Sepam series 80 with ACE850 communication module supports
GOOSE messages for:
b improved system protection:
v Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI)
v inter-tripping
b improved system control:
v user-defined Logipam contacts.
High level of performance and security of these messages is ensured by:
b use of fiber optic data link
b use of IEC 61850 compatible managed Ethernet switches
b selection of a fault-tolerant communication architecture
Time-Stamping
Time-stamped events
The time-stamping function assigns a date and precise time to status changes (events)
so that they can be accurately organized over time. Sepam systematically time-stamps
the following events:
b status changes of all logic inputs
b status changes of all remote indications (TS - alarms and internal status conditions).
Each event is time-stamped to within one millisecond.
The number of stacks of time-stamped events managed by Sepam on each
communication port and the volume of each stack in terms of the numbers of events
depend on the communication protocol used.
Number of event
stacks for each Sepam
communication port
Number of events per
stack
Modbus RTU DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
2
1
1
Depending on
configuration
64
100
100
Depending on
configuration
Whatever the communication protocol used, Modbus RTU, DNP3, IEC 60870-5-103
or IEC 61850 events may be used by a remote monitoring and control system for data
logging and histories, for example.
Unsolicited events
Using the DNP3 and IEC 61850 protocols, Sepam can spontaneously transmit timestamped events to the supervisor. The transmission of unsolicited events must be
activated during setup.
Time-setting and synchronization
The Sepam internal clock manages the date and time. Time-setting is possible:
b via the Sepam display
b using the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link.
To ensure long-term time stability or to coordinate a number of devices, Sepam units
can be synchronized:
b by an external pulse to a dedicated logic input
b via the communication link.
39
1
Communication
Available Sepam Data
Description
Remote Setting
1
Sepam parameter and protection settings
The following remote-setting functions are available:
b selection of the protection-setting group
b reading of general parameters
b reading of protection settings (remote reading)
b writing of protection settings (remote setting).
The writing of protection settings may be blocked by parameter setting.
S-LAN and E-LAN networks
The availability of remote-setting functions over the S-LAN depends on the
communication protocol used. All remote-setting functions are available over the
E-LAN using the SFT2841 software.
Other Data Accessible via Special Functions
Network diagnosis
The network diagnostic information recorded in files by Sepam can also be transmitted
over the communication link:
b disturbance-recording records in COMTRADE format
b tripping contexts
b Out-of-sync context.
Identification of Sepam
The identification function enables the supervisor to clearly identify the device
connected to the S-LAN, based on the following elements of information:
b manufacturer identification
b Sepam type.
This function is available for all Sepam relays, whatever the protocol used.
40
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 20
and Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 20 - Sepam Series 40
42
Selection Table Sepam Series 20
42
Selection Table Sepam Series 40
43
Sensor Inputs
44
General Settings
45
Metering and Diagnosis
46
Description
Characteristics
46
49
Protection
50
Description
Main Characteristics
Setting Ranges
50
54
55
Control and Monitoring
58
Description
Description of Predefined Functions
Adaptation of Predefined Functions Using the SFT2841 Software
58
59
61
Characteristics
62
Base Unit
62
Presentation
Dimensions
Description
Technical Characteristics
Environmental Characteristics
62
65
66
68
69
Connection Diagrams
70
Base Unit
70
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Other Phase Current Input Connection Schemes
Other Residual Current Input Connection Schemes
70
71
72
73
Voltage Inputs
75
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
75
76
41
Selection Table
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Substation
2
Protection
Phase overcurrent
Ground fault / Sensitive ground fault
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload
Phase undercurrent
Excessive starting time, locked rotor
Starts per hour
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Line-to-line undervoltage
Line-to-neutral undervoltage
Line-to-line overvoltage
Neutral voltage displacement
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
Recloser (4 shots)
Thermostat / Buchholz
Temperature monitoring (8 RTDs)
Motor
Bus
ANSI code
S20
S23
T20
T23
M20
B21 (3)
B22
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
37
48/51LR/14
66
27D/47
27R
27
27S
59
59N
81H
81L
81R
79
26/63
38/49T
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
v
b
b
b
v
Transformer
1
2
1
1
1
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
Metering
Phase current Ia, Ib, Ic RMS, residual current Ir
Demand current Ia, Ib, Ic, maximum demand current Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax
Voltage Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, residual voltage Vr
Positive sequence voltage V1 / rotation direction
Frequency
Temperature
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping current TripIa, TripIb, TripIc, TripIr
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I2
Disturbance recording
Thermal capacity used
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping
Running hours counter / operating time
Starting current and time
Start block time
Number of starts before blocking
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Switchgear diagnosis
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
94/69
86
68
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
30
b
b
Cumulative breaking current
Trip circuit supervision
Number of operations, operating time, charging time
Control and monitoring
Circuit breaker / contactor control (1)
Latching / acknowledgement
Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI)
Switching of groups of settings
Annunciation
ANSI code
(2)
b
b
(2)
b
b
(2)
b
b
(2)
b (2)
b
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET1482 module
v
v
v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module
v
v
v
v
v
v
Logic inputs/outputs v
v
v
v
v
v
MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module
Communication interface v
v
v
v
v
v
ACE9492, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO
b standard v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET1482 input/output module options.
(1) For NO or NC trip contacts.
(2) Exclusive choice between Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI) and switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group.
(3) Performs Sepam B20 functions.
(4) the digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for each protection function.
42
v
v
v
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Selection Table
Sepam Series 40
Substation
Protection
Phase overcurrent
Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Ground fault / Sensitive ground fault
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Directional phase overcurrent
Directional ground fault
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive overpower
Thermal overload
Phase undercurrent
Excessive starting time, locked rotor
Starts per hour
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (3)
Overvoltage (3)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Recloser (4 shots)
Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)
Thermostat / Buchholz
Transformer
Motor
ANSI code
S40
S41
S42
T40
T42
M41
G40
50/51
50V/51V
50N/51N
50G/51G
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
50BF
46
67
67N/67NC
32P
32Q/40
49RMS
37
48/51LR/14
66
27D
27R
27/27S
59
59N
47
81H
81L
79
38/49T
26/63
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
Generator
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
Metering
Phase current Ia, Ib, Ic RMS, residual current Ir
Demand current Ia, Ib, Ic, maximum demand current Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax
Voltage Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, residual voltage Vr
Positive sequence voltage V1 / rotation direction
Negative sequence voltage V2
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Frequency
Active, reactive and apparent power P, Q, S
Maximum demand power Pmax, Qmax, power factor
Calculated active and reactive energy (±W.h, ±var.h)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
v
b
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (±W.h, ±.varh)
Temperature
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping context
Tripping current TripIa, TripIb, TripIc, TripIr
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I2
Phase displacement ϕ0, ϕa, ϕb, ϕc
Disturbance recording
Thermal capacity used
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping
Running hours counter / operating time
Starting current and time
Start block time, number of starts before blocking
Switchgear diagnosis
Cumulative breaking current
Trip circuit supervision
Number of operations, operating time, charging time
CT / VT supervision
Control and monitoring
Circuit breaker / contactor control (1)
Latching / acknowledgement
Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI)
Switching of groups of settings
Annunciation
Logic equation editor
60FL
ANSI code
94/69
86
68
30
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET1482 module (2)
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module
Logic inputs/outputs MES114/MES114E/MES114F (10I/4O) module
Communication interface ACE9492, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850
b standard v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET1482 input/output module options.
(1) For NO or NC trip contacts.
(2) 2 modules possible.
(3) Exclusive choice, line-to-neutral voltage or line-to-line voltage for each of the 2 relays.
(4) the digits in the matrix to the right of the ANSI code indicate the number of units available for each protection function.
43
Sensor Inputs
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
DE51809
Sepam Series 20 Sensor Inputs
Sepam™ T20
NO
IN
INr
Ir
IB
Phase current inputs
Residual current input
Phase voltage inputs
Residual voltage input
Temperature inputs
(on MET1482 module)
S20, S23
T20, T23, M20 B21, B22
3
1
0
0
0
3
1
0
0
8
0
0
3
1
0
Sepam T20 sensor inputs.
DE51810
2
Each Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 has analog inputs that are connected to the
measurement sensors required for the application.
NO
VLnP
VLnS
Sepam Series 40 Sensor Inputs
Sepam™ M41
IN
INr
IB
Sepam M41 sensor inputs.
44
Ir
Phase current inputs
Residual current input
Phase voltage inputs
Residual voltage input
Temperature inputs
(on MET1482 module)
S40, S41,
S42
T40, T42, M41, G40
3
1
2
1
0
3
1
2
1
2x8
3
0
3
0
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
General Settings
The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected
to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions
used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software “General Characteristics”,
“CT-VT Sensors” and “Particular characteristics” tabs.
General settings
IN
Rated phase current
(sensor primary current)
IB
Base current, according to rated power of equipment
INr
Rated residual current
VLLp
VLLs
VLLsr
Rated primary line-to-line voltage
(VLnp: rated primary line-to-neutral voltage
VLnp = VLLp/3)
Rated secondary line-to-line voltage
Secondary zero sequence voltage relative to primary
zero sequence voltage VLLnp/3
Rated frequency
Demand interval (for demand current and maximum
demand current and power)
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter
Selection
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
2 or 3 CT 1 A / 5 A
3 LPCTs
1 A to 6250 A
25 A to 3150 A (1)
0.4 to 1.3 IN
1 A to 6250 A
25 A to 3150 A (1)
0.4 to 1.3 IN
Sum of 3-phase currents
See IN rated phase current
See IN rated phase current
CSH120 or CSH200 zero
sequence CT
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30
interposing ring CT
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30
interposing ring CT
Sensitivity x10
Zero sequence CT
+ ACE990 (the zero
sequence CT ratio
1/n must be such that
50 y n y 1500)
2 A or 20 A rating
2 A, 5 A or 20 A rating
1 A to 6250 A
1 A to 6250 A (INr = IN)
-
1 A to 6250 A (INr = IN/10)
According to current
monitored
and use of ACE990
According to current
monitored
and use of ACE990
220 V to 250 kV
220 V to 250 kV
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V
100, 110, 115, 120 V
100, 110, 115, 120 V
VLLns/3 or VLLns/3
100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V
100, 110, 115, 120 V
100, 110, 115, 120 V
VLLns/3 or VLLns/3
50 Hz or 60 Hz
5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
50 Hz or 60 Hz
5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
-
0.1 kW.h to 5 MW.h
0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.h
3 VTs: Van, Vbn, Vcn
2 VTs: Vab, Vbc
1 VT: Van
Increments active energy
Increments reactive
energy
(1) IN values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
45
2
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Metering
2
Sepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and diagnosis data used for
commissioning and required for the operation and maintenance of your equipment are
available locally or remotely, expressed in the units concerned (A, V, W, etc.).
Phase current
RMS current for each phase, taking into account harmonics up to number 13.
Different types of sensors may be used to meter phase current:
b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT type current sensors.
Residual current
Two residual current values are available depending on the type of Sepam and sensors
connected to it:
b residual currents IrΣ, calculated by the vector sum of the 3-phase currents
b measured residual current Ir.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure residual current:
b CSH120 or CSH200 specific zero sequence CT
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer
b any zero sequence CT with an ACE990 interface.
Demand current and maximum demand currents
Demand current and maximum demand currents are calculated according to the
3-phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic:
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable period of 5 to 60 minutes
b maximum demand current is the greatest demand current and indicates the current
drawn by maximum loads.
Maximum demand currents may be cleared.
Voltage and frequency
The following measurements are available according to the voltage sensors
connected:
b line-to-neutral voltages Van, Vbn, Vcn
b line-to-line voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca
b residual voltage Vr
b positive sequence voltage V1 and negative sequence voltage V2
b frequency f.
Power
Powers are calculated according to the phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic:
b active power
b reactive power
b apparent power
b power factor (pf).
Power calculation is based on the 2 wattmeter method. The 2 wattmeter method is
only accurate when there is no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral is
distributed.
Maximum demand powers
The greatest demand active and reactive power values calculated over the same
period as the demand current. The maximum demand powers may be cleared.
Energy
b 4 accumulated energies calculated according to voltages and phase currents
measured: active energy and reactive energy in both directions
b 1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters for the acquisition of active or reactive
energy pulses from external meters.
Temperature
Accurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100
or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET1482 module.
46
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Machine Diagnosis
Assistance
Sepam assists facility managers by providing:
b data on the operation of their machines
b predictive data to optimize process management
b useful data to facilitate protection function setting and
implementation.
Thermal capacity used
Equivalent temperature buildup in the machine,
calculated by the thermal overload protection function.
Displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.
Remaining operating time before
overload tripping
Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload
protection function. The time is used by facility
managers to optimize process management in real time
by deciding to:
b interrupt according to procedures
b continue operation with blocking of thermal protection
on overloaded machine.
Waiting time after overload tripping
Predictive data calculated by the thermal overload
protection function. Waiting time to avoid further tripping
of thermal overload protection by premature
re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.
Running hours counter / operating time
Equipment is considered to be running whenever a
phase current is over 0.1 IB. Cumulative operating time
is given in hours.
Motor starting / overload current and time
A motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when
a phase current is over 1.2 IB. For each start / overload,
Sepam stores:
b maximum current drawn by the motor
b starting / overload time.
The values are stored until the next start / overload
operation.
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Network Diagnosis Assistance
Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network
disturbances detected by Sepam are recorded for analysis purposes.
Tripping context
Storage of tripping currents and Ir, I2, Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vr, V2, V1, f, P and Q values
when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are stored.
Tripping current
Storage of the 3-phase currents and ground fault current at the time of the last Sepam
trip command, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.
Negative sequence / unbalance
Negative sequence component of phase currents Ia, Ib and Ic, indicating the degree of
unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment.
Phase displacement
b phase displacement ϕa, ϕb, ϕc between phase currents l1, l2, l3 and voltages Van,
Vbn, Vcn respectively
b phase displacement ϕr between residual current and residual voltage.
Disturbance recording
Recording triggered by user-set events:
b all sampled values of measured currents and voltages
b status of all logic inputs and outputs
b logic data: instantaneous, etc.
Characteristics
Number of recordings in
COMTRADE format
Total duration of a recording
Number of samples per period
Duration of recording before
occurrence of the event
Recorded data
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
2
Adjustable from 1 to 19
86 periods
(1.72 s at 50 Hz,
1.43 s at 60 Hz)
Adjustable from 1 to 10 s.
The total of all the records plus
one must not be more than
20 s at 50 Hz and 16 s at 60 Hz
12
Adjustable from 0 to 86
periods
b currents or voltages
b logic inputs
b pick up
b logic output O1.
12
Adjustable from 0 to
99 periods
b currents and voltages
b logic inputs
b pick up
b logic outputs O1 to O4.
Number of starts before blocking/start
block time
Indicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts
per hour protection function. If the number is zero, it
indicates only one start is allowed.
47
2
2
Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the
base unit and optional modules. The purpose of the
self-tests is to:
b detect internal failures that may cause nuisance
tripping or failed fault tripping
b put Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted
operation
b alert the facility manager of the need for maintenance
operations.
Internal failure
Two categories of internal failures are monitored:
b major failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position).
The protection functions are blocked, the output relays
are forced to drop out and the “Watchdog” output
indicates Sepam shutdown
b minor failures: downgraded Sepam operation.
Sepam’s main functions are operational and
equipment protection is ensured.
Detection of plugged connectors
The system checks that the current or voltage sensors
are plugged in. A missing connector is a major failure.
Configuration checking
The system checks that the optional modules configured
are present and working correctly. The absence or failure
of a remote module is a minor failure, the absence or
failure of a logic input/output module is a major failure.
Switchgear Diagnosis Assistance
Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers information on:
b mechanical condition of breaking device
b Sepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and curative switchgear
maintenance actions.
The data are to be compared to switchgear manufacturer data.
ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT supervision
Used to monitor the entire metering chain:
b CT and VT sensors
b connection
b Sepam analog inputs.
Monitoring includes:
b consistency checking of currents and voltages measured
b acquisition of phase or residual voltage transformer protection fuse blown contacts.
In the event of a loss of current or voltage measurement data, the assigned protection
functions may be blocked to avoid nuisance tripping.
ANSI 74 - Trip circuit supervision
To determine the health of the trip circuit, Sepam monitors:
b shunt trip coil connection
b matching of breaking device open/closed position contacts
b execution of breaking device open and close commands.
The trip circuit is only supervised when connected as shown below.
NO
DE51813
Sepam Self-Diagnosis
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
DE51812
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
NO
Connection for shunt trip coil
monitoring.
Connection for undervoltage
trip coil monitoring.
Cumulative breaking current
Six cumulative currents are proposed to assess the pole condition of the breaking
device:
b total cumulative breaking current
b cumulative breaking current between 0 and 2 IN
b cumulative breaking current between 2 IN and 5 IN
b cumulative breaking current between 5 IN and 10 IN
b cumulative breaking current between 10 IN and 40 IN
b cumulative breaking current > 40 IN.
Each time the breaking device opens, the breaking current is added to the cumulative
total and to the appropriate range of cumulative breaking current. Cumulative breaking
current is given in (kA)².
Number of operations
Cumulative number of opening operations performed by the breaking device.
Circuit breaker operating time and charging time
Used to assess the condition of the operating mechanism of the breaking device.
48
Metering and Diagnosis
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Functions
Measurement
Range
Accuracy (1)
Sepam Series 20
Accuracy (1)
Sepam Series 40
MSA141
0.1 to 40IN(3)
0.1 to 40 IN
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 40 IN
0.1 to 40 IN
0.05 to 1.2 VLLp
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
0.015 to 3 VLnp
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
0.05 to 1,2 VLnp
50 ±5 Hz or 60 ±5 Hz
25 to 65 Hz
0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW
0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar
0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MVA
0.015 Sn(2) to 999 MW
0.015 Sn(2) to 999 Mvar
-1 to +1 (CAP/IND)
0 to 2.1.108 MW.h
0 to 2.1.108 Mvar.h
-30 to +200 °C
or -22 to +392 °F
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±5 %
±0.05 Hz
±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
±1 °F from +68 to +284 °F
±0.5 %
±1 %
±1 %
±0.5 %
±0.5 %
±0.5 %
±0.5 %
±1 %
±2 %
±2 %
±0.02 Hz
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 % ±1 digit
±1 % ±1 digit
±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
±1 °F from +68 to +284 °F
b
b
b
0.1 to 40 IN
0.1 to 20 INr
10 to 500 % of IB
0 to 359°
0 to 359°
±5 %
±5 %
±2 %
-
±5 %
±5 %
±2 %
±2°
±2°
0 to 800 %
(100 % for I phase = IB)
0 to 999 min
±1 %
±1 %
±1 min
±1 min
0 to 999 min
0 to 65535 hours
1.2 IB to 24 IN
0 to 300 s
0 to 60
0 to 360 min
5 to 600 min
±1 min
±1 % or ±0.5 h
±5 %
±300 ms
1
±1 min
-
±1 min
±1 % or ±0.5 h
±5 %
±300 ms
1
±1 min
±5 min
Saving
2
Metering
Phase current
Residual current
Calculated
Measured
Demand current
Maximum demand current
Line-to-line voltage
Line-to-neutral voltage
Residual voltage
Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage
Frequency Sepam series 20
Frequency Sepam series 40
Active power
Reactive power
Apparent power
Maximum demand active power
Maximum demand reactive power
Power factor
Calculated active energy
Calculated reactive energy
Temperature
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
Network diagnosis assistance
Tripping context
Phase tripping current
Ground fault tripping current
Negative sequence / unbalance
Phase displacement 0 (between Vr and Ir)
Phase displacement 1, 2, 3
(between V and I)
v
v
v
Machine operating assistance
Thermal capacity used
Remaining operating time before overload
tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping
Running hours counter / operating time
Starting current
Starting time
Number of starts before blocking
Start block time
Cooling time constant
b
v
v
v
v
Switchgear diagnosis assistance
Cumulative breaking current
0 to 65535 kA²
±10 %
1
Number of operations
0 to 4.109
Operating time
20 to 100 ms
±1 ms
Charging time
1 to 20 s
±0.5 s
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup.
v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at IN or VLLp, pf > 0.8.
(2) Sn: apparent power, = 3.VLLp.IN.
(3) Measurement up to 0.02 IN for information purpose.
±10 %
1
±1 ms
±0.5 s
v
v
v
v
49
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Protection
Description
Current Protection Functions
2
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Line-to-line short-circuit protection, sensitive to the
highest phase current measured.
Protection against phase unbalance, detected by the measurement of negative
sequence current:
b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the ends of long lines
b protection of equipment against temperature build-up, caused by an unbalanced
power supply, phase inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current
unbalance.
Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16
standardized IDMT curves)
b with or without timer hold
With Sepam series 40, tripping can be confirmed or
unconfirmed, according to parameter setting:
b unconfirmed tripping: standard
b tripping confirmed by negative sequence overvoltage
protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup for distant
2-phase short-circuits
b tripping confirmed by undervoltage protection
(ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for line-to-line shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power.
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Ground fault
Ground fault protection based on measured or calculated
residual current values:
b ANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or
measured by 3-phase current sensors
b ANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by
a specific sensor.
Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b Definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16
standardized IDMT curves)
b with or without timer hold
b second harmonic restraint to ensure stability during
transformer energizing, activated by parameter
setting.
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure
If a breaker fails to be triggered by a tripping command,
as detected by the non-extinction of the fault current,
this backup protection sends a tripping command to the
upstream or adjacent breakers.
Characteristics
b Sepam series 20:
v 1 definite time (DT) curve
v 1 specific Schneider IDMT curve.
b Sepam series 40:
v 1 definite time (DT) curve
v 7 IDMT curves: 3 IEC curves, 3 IEEE curves and 1 specific Schneider curve.
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload
Protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on machines (transformers,
motors or generators). The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a
mathematical model which takes into account:
b current RMS values
b ambient temperature
b negative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise.
The thermal capacity used calculations may be used to calculate predictive data for
process control assistance. The protection may be blocked by a logic input when
required by process control conditions.
Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b 1 adjustable alarm set point
b 1 adjustable tripping set point
b adjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to
fit manufacturer’s thermal withstand curves
b equipment heating and cooling time constants.
With Sepam series 40, the cooling time constant may be calculated automatically
based on measurement of the equipment temperature by a sensor.
Recloser
ANSI 79
Automation device used to limit down time after tripping due to transient or semipermanent faults on overhead lines. The recloser automatically recloses the breaking
device after the insulation restoring time delay. Recloser operation is easy to adapt for
different operating modes by parameter setting.
Characteristics
b 1 to 4 reclosing shots, each shot has an adjustable “dead time;” and adjustable
independent “reclaim time” and “blocking time” until recloser ready
b shot activation linked to instantaneous or time-delayed short-circuit protection function
(ANSI 50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter setting
b blocking/lockout of recloser by logic input.
50
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Protection
Description
Directional Current Protection
2
ANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent
Line-to-line short-circuit protection, with selective tripping according to fault current
direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function associated with direction
detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the chosen direction (line or
bus) is activated for at least one of the 3 phases.
Characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b choice of tripping direction
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization
voltage at the time of the fault
b with or without timer hold.
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional ground fault
DE52062
Ground fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault current direction.
3 types of operation:
b type 1: the protection function uses the projection of the Ir vector
b type 2: the protection function uses the Ir vector magnitude with half-plane tripping
zone
b type 3: the protection function uses the Ir vector magnitude with angular sector
tripping zone
ANSI 67N/67NC type 1
Directional ground fault protection for impedance, isolated or compensated neutral
systems, based on the projection of measured residual current.
DE52063
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection
(characteristic angle θr 0°).
Type 1 characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) curve
b choice of tripping direction
b characteristic projection angle
b no timer hold
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in
compensated neutral systems.
ANSI 67N/67NC type 2
Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly grounded systems,
based on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises a ground fault function
associated with direction detection, and picks up if the ground fault function in the
chosen direction (line or bus) is activated.
Type 2 characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b choice of tripping direction
b with or without timer hold.
DE52064
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection
(characteristic angle θr 0°).
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3
Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral
grounding system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured
residual current. It comprises a ground fault function associated with direction
detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if
the ground fault function in the chosen direction (line or bus) is activated.
This protection function complies with the Enel DK5600 specification.
Type 3 characteristics
b 2 groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) curve
b choice of tripping direction
b no timer hold
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection.
51
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
2
Directional Power Protection
Functions
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower
Two-way protection based on calculated active power,
for the following applications:
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and
allow load shedding
b reverse active power protection:
v against generators running like motors when the
generators consume active power
v against motors running like generators when the
motors supply active power.
ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive
overpower
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive power
to detect field loss on synchronous machines:
b reactive overpower protection for motors which
consume more reactive power with field loss
b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators
which consume reactive power with field loss.
Protection
Description
Machine Protection Functions
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection
of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive to a minimum of current in phase 1, remains
stable during breaker tripping and may be blocked by a logic input.
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor / excessive starting time
Protection of motors against overheating caused by:
b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (e.g. conveyor) or insufficient supply
voltage. The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic
input, may be considered as starting.
b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
v in normal operation, after a normal start
v directly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with
detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by
the underspeed function.
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
Protection against motor overheating caused by:
b too frequent starts: motor energizing is blocked when the maximum allowable
number of starts is reached, after counting of:
v starts per hour (or adjustable period)
v consecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut
down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start)
b starts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only
allowed after an adjustable waiting time.
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Line-to-line short-circuit protection for generators. The current tripping set point is
voltage-adjusted in order to be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause
voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current.
Characteristics
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) or IDMT curve (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves)
b with or without timer hold.
ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/Buchholz
Protection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs
linked to devices integrated in the transformer.
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring
Protection that detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature
inside equipment fitted with sensors:
b transformer: protection of primary and secondary windings
b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
Characteristics
b Sepam series 20: 8 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
b Sepam series 40: 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
b 2 adjustable independent set points for each RTD (alarm and trip).
52
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Protection
Description
Voltage Protection Functions
Frequency Protection Functions
ANSI 27D - Positive sequence
undervoltage
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Protection of motors against faulty operation due to
insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and detection
of reverse rotation direction.
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
Protection used to check that remanent voltage
sustained by rotating machines has been cleared before
allowing the bus supplying the machines to be reenergized, to avoid electrical and mechanical transients.
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage
Protection of motors against voltage sags or detection
of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic
load shedding or source transfer. Works with line-to-line
voltage (Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40) or lineto-neutral voltage (Sepam series 40 only), each voltage
being monitored separately.
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage
Detection of abnormally high network voltage or
checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer.
Works with line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage, each
voltage being monitored separately.
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
Detection of insulation faults by measuring residual
voltage in isolated neutral systems.
2
Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
power supply quality.
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Detection of abnormally low frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
power supply quality. The protection may be used for overall tripping or load shedding.
Protection stability is ensured in the event of the loss of the main source and presence
of remanent voltage by a continuous decrease of the frequency, which is activated by
parameter setting.
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
Protection function used for fast disconnection of a generator or load shedding control.
Based on the calculation of the frequency variation, it is insensitive to transient voltage
disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function.
Disconnection
In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the “rate of
change of frequency” protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in
view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to:
b protect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization
b avoid supplying loads outside the installation.
Load shedding
The “rate of change of frequency” protection function is used for load shedding in
combination with the underfrequency protection to:
b either accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload
b or block shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should
not be solved by shedding.
ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage
Protection against phase unbalance resulting from
phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault,
detected by the measurement of negative sequence
voltage.
53
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Protection
Main Characteristics
Current IDMT Tripping Curves
2
Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications:
b IEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT)
b IEEE curves (MI, VI, EI)
b usual curves (UIT, RI, IAC).
The curve equations are given page 94.
Setting of IDMT Tripping Curves,
Time Delay T or TMS Factor
The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves)
may be set as follows:
b time T, operating time at 10 x Is
b TMS factor, factor shown as T/β (see curve equation page 94).
Timer Hold
DE50275
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for:
b detection of restriking faults (DT curve)
b coordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve).
Timer hold may be blocked if necessary.
2 Groups of Settings
Line-to-line and line-to-ground short-circuit protection
Each unit has 2 groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network
configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the
communication link.
Example of use: normal / backup mode network
b group A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the
utility
b group B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a
backup generator.
Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.
Thermal overload for machines
Each unit has 2 groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating modes.
Examples of use:
b transformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer
ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF)
b motors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into
account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors.
Summary Table
Characteristics
2 groups of settings A and B
2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2
IEC IDMT curves
IEEE IDMT curves
Usual IDMT curves
Timer hold
54
Protection Functions
50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC
49RMS Machine
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
Protection
Setting Ranges
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Functions
Settings
Time Delays
2
ANSI 27 - Line-to-line undervoltage
5 to 100 % of VLLp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage
15 to 60 % of VLLp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
5 to 100 % of VLLp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27S - Line-to-neutral undervoltage
5 to 100 % of VLnp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 32P - Directional active overpower
1 to 120 % of Sn (3)
0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32Q/40 - Directional reactive overpower
5 to 120 % of Sn (3)
0.1 s to 300 s
0.15 to 1 IB
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)
Alarm and trip set points
0 to 180 °C (or 32 to 356 °F)
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Definite time
IDMT
Tripping curve
0.1 to 5 IB
0.1 to 0.5 IB (Schneider Electric) 0.1 to 1 IB (IEC, IEEE)
Schneider Electric
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C (2)
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) (2)
0.1 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 1 s
ANSI 47 - Negative sequence overvoltage
1 to 50 % of VLLp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time, locked rotor
0.5 IB to 5 IB
ST starting time
LT and LTS time delays
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload
0.5 s to 300 s
0.05 s to 300 s
Rate 1 and Rate 2
Accounting for negative sequence component
Time constant
Heating
Cooling
Alarm and tripping set points
Cold curve modification factor
Switching of thermal settings conditions
Maximum equipment temperature
0 - 2,25 - 4,5 - 9
Sepam series 20
T1: 1 to 120 min
Sepam series 40
T1: 1 to 600 min
Sepam series 20
T2: 1 to 600 min
Sepam series 40
T2: 5 to 600 min
50 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
0 to 100 %
By logic input
By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 IB
60 to 200 °C (140 °F to 392 °F)
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
Tripping curve
Is set point
Timer hold
Confirmation (2)
Tripping time delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
0.1 to 24 IN
0.1 to 2.4 IN
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
None
By negative sequence overvoltage
By line-to-line undervoltage
Timer hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
Definite time
IDMT
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure
Presence of current
Operating time
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
(2) Sepam series 40 only.
(3) Sn = 3.IN.VLLp.
0.2 to 2 IN
0.05 s to 300 s
55
Protection
Setting Ranges
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
2
Functions
Settings
Time Delays
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Ground fault / Sensitive ground fault
Tripping curve
Is r set point
Timer hold
Tripping time delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
0.1 to 15 INr
0.1 to 1 INr
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
Timer hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
Definite time
IDMT
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Tripping curve
Is set point
Timer hold
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage
Tripping time delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
0.5 to 24 IN
0.5 to 2,4 IN
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
Timer hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
Definite time
IDMT
Line-to-line
Line-to-neutral (2)
50 to 150 % of VLLp
50 to 150 % of VLnp
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
2 to 80 % of VLLp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
Starts per period
Consecutive starts
1 to 60
1 to 60
Period
Time between starts
1 to 6 hr
0 to 90 min
ANSI 67 - Directional phase overcurrent
Tripping curve
Is set point
Timer hold
Characteristic angle
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
(2) Sepam series 40 only.
56
Tripping time delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
0.1 to 24 IN
0.1 to 2,4 IN
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
30°, 45°, 60°
Timer hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
Definite time
IDMT
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
Protection
Setting Ranges
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Functions
Settings
Time Delays
2
ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 - Directional ground fault, according to Ir projection
Characteristic angle
Isr set point
Vsr set point
Memory time
-45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
0.1 to 15 INr
2 to 80 % of Un
T0mem time
Vrmem validity set point
Definite time
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0 ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0 ; 2 to 80 % of VLLp
ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 - Directional ground fault, according to Ir magnitude with half-plan tripping zone
Characteristic angle
Tripping curve
Isr set point
Vsr set point
Timer hold
-45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Tripping time delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
0.5 to 15 INr
0.5 to 1 INr
2 to 80 % of VLLp
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
Timer hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
Definite time
IDMT
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 - Directional ground fault, according to Ir magnitude with angular sector tripping zone
Angle at start of tripping zone
Angle at end of tripping zone
Isr set point
CSH zero sequence CT
(2 A rating)
1 A CT
(sensitive, INr = 0.1 CT IN)
Zero sequence CT +
ACE990 (range 1)
Vsr set point
0° to 359°
0° to 359°
0.1 A to 30 A
Definite time
Inst ; 0.05 to 300 s
0.05 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
0.05 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
Calculated Vr (sum of 3 voltages)
Measured Vr (external VT)
2 to 80 % of VLLp
0.6 to 80 % of VLLp
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz
50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz
0.1 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 300 s
45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz
40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz
0.1 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
0.1 to 10 Hz/s
Inst ; 0.15 s to 300 s
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
57
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Control and Monitoring
Description
Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network
operation:
b the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
b the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
v customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs, and annunciation messages
v logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and
monitoring functions (Sepam series 40 only)
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).
2
Operating principle
DE52789
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into
3 phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input /
output module
v remote control commands (TC) received via the Modbus communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control a device
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link.
Logic inputs and outputs
The number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and
monitoring functions used. The 4 outputs included in the Sepam base unit (series 20
or series 40) may be extended by adding one MES114 module with 10 logic inputs
and 4 output relays. After selecting the MES114 type required by an application, the
logic inputs must be assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation. A default input / output assignment is proposed for the
most frequent uses.
58
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
Each Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for
the chosen application.
ANSI 94/69 - Circuit Breaker/Contactor Control
Control of interrupting devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils:
b circuit breakers with NO or NC trip contacts
b latching contactors with NO contacts
The function processes all interrupting device closing and tripping conditions, based on:
b protection functions
b interrupting device status data
b remote control commands
b specific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser).
The function also blocks interrupting device closing, according to the operating
conditions.
With Sepam series 20, it is necessary to use an MES114 module in order to have all the
required logic inputs.
ANSI 86 - Latching / acknowledgement
The tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be
latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power
outage. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.)
All the latched data may be acknowledged:
reset
key
b locally, with the
b remotely via a logic input
b or via the communication link.
The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/
contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 “Lockout relay” function.
ANSI 68 - Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)
This function provides:
b perfect tripping coordination with line-to-line and line-to-ground short-circuits, on all
types of networks
b faster tripping of the breakers closest to the fault (solving the drawback of
conventional time coordination).
Each Sepam is capable of:
b sending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and
ground fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC)
b and receiving blocking inputs which block protection tripping. A control logic ensures
continued operation of the protection in the event that a blocking link malfunctions or
is lost.
Output relay testing
Each output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output
connections and connected switchgear operation.
59
2
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
ANSI 30 - Local annunciation
LED indication on the Sepam front panel
b 2 LEDs indicate the unit operating status:
v green LED ON: Sepam on
v red “key” LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal
failure)
b 9 yellow LEDs:
v pre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels
v the SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels.
PE50287
2
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
Local indications on the Sepam front panel.
Local annunciation on Sepam’s advanced UMI
Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam’s advanced UMI by:
b messages on the display unit, available in 2 languages:
v English, factory-set messages, not modifiable
v local language, according to the version delivered (the language version is
chosen when Sepam is set up)
b the lighting up of one of the 9 yellow LEDs, according to the LED assignment, which
is set using SFT2841.
Alarm processing
b when an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the
related LED goes on.
The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages
are linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the
SFT2841 “Alarms” screen.
b to clear the message from the display, press the
b after the fault has disappeared, press the
reset
reset
60
clear
key.
key
key: the light goes off and Sepam is
b the list of alarm messages remains accessible (
pressing the
clear
key) and may be cleared by
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Control and Monitoring
Adaptation of Predefined Functions
Using the SFT2841 Software
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
b customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages
b logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions (Sepam series 40 only)
b creation of personalized messages for local annunciation (Sepam series 40 only).
PE50133
Control matrix
The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from:
b protection functions
b control and monitoring functions
b logic inputs
b logic equations
to the following output data:
b output relays
b 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b messages for local annunciation
b triggering of disturbance recording.
SFT2841: control matrix.
Logic equation editor (Sepam series 40)
The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to:
b complete protection function processing:
v additional interlocking
v conditional blocking/validation of functions etc.
b adapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control
sequences, etc.
A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from:
b protection functions
b logic inputs
b remote control commands
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as
time delays, bi-stables and time programmer. Equation input is assisted and syntax
checking is done systematically.
The result of an equation may then be:
b assigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix
b transmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication
b utilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or block
interrupting device closing
b used to block or reset a protection function.
Personalized alarm and operating messages (Sepam series 40)
The alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software
tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be
assigned via the control matrix for display:
b on the Sepam display
b in the SFT2841 “Alarms” and “Alarm History” screens.
61
2
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
User-Machine Interface
Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam base units
(series 20 or series 40):
b advanced UMI
b basic UMI.
The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
cubicle. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions.
PE50492
A Sepam (series 20 or series 40) with a remote advanced UMI is made up of :
b a base unit with basic UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
b a remote advanced UMI (DSM303)
v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
the facility manager
v for connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cord.
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented in the
DSM303 section of Chapter 4.
Advanced UMI
Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with integrated
advanced UMI.
Comprehensive data for facility managers
All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand:
b display of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/or
in bar graphs
b display of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam
resetting
b display and setting of all the Sepam parameters
b display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function
b display of Sepam and remote module versions
b output testing and logic input status display
b entry of 2 passwords to protect parameter and protection settings.
PE50493
Ergonomic data presentation
b keypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation
b menu-guided access to data.
b graphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol
b excellent display quality under all lighting conditions: automatic contrast setting and
backlit screen (user activated).
Basic UMI
A Sepam with basic UMI offers an economical solution suited to installations that do
not require local operation (managed by a remote monitoring and control system) or
to replace electromechanical or analog electronic protections units with no additional
operating needs. The basic UMI includes:
b 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status:
b 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps equipped with a standard label
reset
button for clearing faults and resetting.
b
Working language
Sepam base unit (series 20 or series 40) with basic UMI.
PE50127
2
Base units are defined according to the
following characteristics:
b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI)
b working language
b type of base unit connector
b type of current sensor connector.
Base Unit
Presentation
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI are available in
2 languages:
b English (IEC), the default working language
b and a second language, which may be
v French
v Spanish
v U.S. English (ANSI)
v another “local” language.
Please contact us regarding local language customization.
Setting and operating software
SFT2841 setting and operating software can be used for easy setting of Sepam
parameters and protection functions. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is
connected to the communication port on the front of the unit.
Customized advanced UMI.
62
Base Unit
Presentation
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Selection Guide
With Remote Advanced
UMI
PE50467
With Integrated
Advanced UMI
PE50466
With Basic UMI
PE50493
Base Unit
Functions
Local indication
Metering and diagnosis data
Alarms and operating messages
Sepam parameter setting
Protection setting
Version of Sepam and remote modules
Status of logic inputs
Local control
Alarm acknowledgement
Sepam reset
Output testing
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
128 x 64 pixels
b
b
128 x 64 pixels
b
b
1
9
9
2 LEDs on front
2 LEDs on front
9 LEDs on front
9 LEDs on front
b base unit: 2 LEDs on front
b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs
on front
9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI
Flush mounted on front of cubicle
Flush mounted on front of cubicle
b
b
Characteristics
Screen
Size
Automatic contrast setting
Backlit screen
Keypad
Number of keys
LEDs
Sepam operating status
Indication LEDs
Mounting
b base unit with basic UMI,
mounted at the back of the
compartment using the AMT840
mounting plate
b DSM303 remote advanced
UMI module ,flush mounted
on the front of the cubicle and
connected to the base unit with
the CCA77x prefabricated cord
63
2
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Base Unit
Presentation
Hardware Characteristics
2
Auxiliary power supply
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 can be supplied by either of the following
voltages:
b 24 to 250 V DC
b 110 to 240 V AC.
Four relay outputs
The 4 relay outputs O1 to O4 on the base unit must be connected to connector
A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841
software. O1, O2 and O3 are 3 control outputs with one NO contact. O1 and O2 are
used by default for the switchgear control function:
b O1: switchgear tripping
b O2: switchgear closing blocked.
O4 is an indication output with one NO contact and one NC contact.
It is used by default for the watchdog function.
Main connector A
A choice of 2 types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors:
b CCA620 screw-type connector
b CCA622 ring lug connector.
Phase current input connector
Current sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to
type of sensors used:
b CCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers
or
b CCA670 connector for LPCT sensors.
The presence of these connectors is monitored.
Voltage input connector
Sepam B21 and B22
Voltage sensors connected to the removable, screw-lockable CCT640 connector. The
presence of the CCT640 connector is monitored.
PE50468
Sepam Series 40
Voltage sensors connected to the 6-pin connector E . A choice of 2 types of
removable, screw-lockable 6-pin connectors:
b CCA626 screw-type connector
or
b CCA627 ring lug connector.
The presence of the E connector is monitored.
Mounting Accessories
AMT840 mounting plate
It is used to mount a Sepam with basic UMI inside the compartment with access to
connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module
(DSM303).
AMT852 lead sealing accessory
The AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification
of the settings of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with integrated advanced
UMIs. The accessory includes:
b a lead-sealable cover plate
b the screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI
of the Sepam unit.
Note: the AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs
of Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 units with serial numbers higher than 0440000.
Sepam unit with integrated advanced UMI and lead sealing
accessory AMT852.
64
Base Unit
Dimensions
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Dimensions
8.74
(222)
in.
(mm)
DE52756
DE52847
DE80030
in.
(mm)
1.57
(40)
7.72
(196)
in.
(mm)
2
6.30
(160)
2.05
(52) 3.86
(98)
1.22
(31)
6.93
(176)
8.74
(222)
6.93
(176)
1.57
(40)
Front view of Sepam.
1.57
(40)
Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114,
flush-mounted in front panel.
1.22
(31)
3.86
(98)
(1) With basic UMI: 23 mm (0.91 in).
Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114,
flush-mounted in front panel.
Clearance for Sepam assembly
and wiring.
Cut-Out
For mounting plate between 1.5 mm
(0.059 in) and 3 mm (0.12 in) thick
For mounting plate
3.17 mm (0.125 inch) thick
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
DE80044
DE80028
Cut-out accuracy must be complied with to ensure proper fit.
7.95 ±0.2
(202 ±0.2)
7.95 ±0.2
(202 ±0.2)
2.91
(74)
0.47
(12)
1.57
(40)
6.38 ±0.2
(162 ±0.2)
1.57
(40)
7.95
(202)
6.38
(162)
8.50
(216)
9.29
(236)
9.06
(230)
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
0.39
(10)
0.59
(15)
6.38 ±0.2
(162 ±0.2)
0.08
(2)
Assembly with AMT840 Mounting Plate
Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to
the connectors on the rear panel.
Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).
DE52756
DE52759
0.26
(6.5)
in.
(mm)
in.
(mm)
6.30
(160)
2.05
(52) 3.86
(98)
AMT840 mounting plate.
6.93
(176)
1.22
(31)
Sepam with basic UMI and MES114, mounted
with AMT840 plate.
Mounting plate thickness: 2 mm (0.079 in).
65
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Green LED: Sepam on.
Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
9 yellow indication LEDs.
Label identifying the indication LEDs.
Graphical LCD screen.
Display of measurements.
Display of switchgear, network and machine
diagnosis data.
Display of alarm messages.
Sepam reset (or confirm data entry).
Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms
(or move cursor up).
LED test (or move cursor down).
Access to protection settings.
Access to Sepam parameter setting.
Entry of 2 passwords.
PC connection port.
Front Panel with Advanced UMI
The “ ↵, ,
keys (9, 10, 11) are used to browse
through the menus and to scroll through and accept
the values displayed.
SEPAM
DIGITAL RELAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
Green LED: Sepam on.
Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
9 yellow indication LEDs.
Label identifying the indication LEDs.
Acknowledgement / clearing of alarms and Sepam
reset.
PC connection port.
Front Panel with Basic UMI
DE51818
2
Base Unit
Description
DE51817
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
SEPAM
DIGITAL RELAY
66
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Rear Panel - Sepam Series 20
Base unit.
A 20-pin connector for:
b auxiliary power supply
b 4 relay outputs
b 1 residual current input (used only with CCA630 CT
connector).
2
DE51819
1
Base Unit
Description
B b Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20:
connector for 3-phase current Ia, Ib, Ic inputs and
residual current
b Sepam B21 and B22:
connector for 3-phase voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn inputs
and 1 residual voltage Vr input.
C Communication port.
D Remote module connection port.
2
3
4
Connector for MES114 input/output module.
2 mounting clips.
2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.
1
Base unit.
A 20-pin connector for:
b auxiliary power supply
b 4 relay outputs
b 1 residual current input (used only with CCA630 CT
connector).
DE51820
Rear Panel - Sepam Series 40
B b Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23, M20:
connector for 3-phase current Ia, Ib, Ic inputs and
residual current
b Sepam B21 and B22:
connector for 3-phase voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn inputs
and 1 residual voltage Vr input.
C Communication port.
D Remote module connection port.
E 6-pin connector for 3-phase voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn
inputs.
2
3
4
Connector for MES114 input/output module.
2 mounting clips.
2 locating nibs in flush-mounted position.
67
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Base Unit
Technical Characteristics
Weight
Sepam series 20
2
Sepam series 40
Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114)
Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114)
Minimum weight (base unit with basic UMI and without MES114)
Maximum weight (base unit with advanced UMI and MES114)
1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
1.7 kg (3.7 lb)
1.4 kg (3.1 lb)
1.9 kg (4.2 lb)
Input impedance
Consumption
< 0.02 W
< 0.02 VA at 1 A
< 0.5 VA at 5 A
4 IN
100 IN
> 100 kW
100 to 230/√3 V
240 V
480 V
Analog Inputs
Current transformer
1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630 or CCA634)
1 A to 6250 A ratings
Rated thermal withstand
1-second overload
Input impedance
Input voltage
Rated thermal withstand
1-second overload
Voltage transformer
220 V to 250 kV ratings
Temperature Sensor Input (MET1482 module)
Type of sensor
Isolation from ground
Current injected in sensor
Maximum distance between sensor and module
Logic Inputs
Voltage
Range
Frequency
Typical consumption
Typical switching threshold
Input limit voltage
At state 1
At state 0
Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groups
Pt 100
None
4 mA
1 km (0.62 mi)
Ni 100 / 120
None
4 mA
MES114
MES114E
24 to 250 V DC
19.2 to 275 V DC
3 mA
14 V DC
u 19 V DC
y 6 V DC
Enhanced
110 to 125 V DC
88 to 150 V DC
3 mA
82 V DC
u 88 V DC
y 75 V DC
Enhanced
MES114F
110 V AC
88 to 132 V AC
47 to 63 Hz
3 mA
58 V AC
u 88 V AC
y 22 V AC
Enhanced
220 to 250 V DC
176 to 275 V DC
3 mA
154 V DC
u 176 V DC
y 137 V DC
Enhanced
220 to 240 V AC
176 to 264 V AC
47 to 63 Hz
3 mA
120 V AC
u 176 V AC
y 48 V AC
Enhanced
Relays Outputs
Control relay outputs (O1, O2, O3, O11 contacts) (2)
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Resistive load
L/R load < 20 ms
L/R load < 40 ms
Resistive load
pf load > 0.3
Making capacity
Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups
24 / 48 V DC
8A
8 / 4A
6 / 2A
4 / 1A
< 15 A for 200 ms
Enhanced
127 V DC
8A
0.7 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
-
220 V DC
8A
0.3 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
-
127 V DC
2A
0.5 A
-
220 V DC
2A
0.15 A
-
100 to 240 V AC
8A
8A
5A
Annunciation relay output (O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)
Voltage
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
L/R load < 20 ms
pf load > 0.3
Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups
24 / 48 V DC
2A
2 / 1A
Enhanced
100 to 240 V AC
2A
1A
Power Supply
Voltage
Range
Deactivated consumption (1)
Maximum consumption (1)
Inrush current
Acceptable momentary outages
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
Sepam series 20, series 40
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 40
24 / 250 V DC
-20 % +10 %
< 4.5 W
<6W
<8W
< 11 W
< 10 A for 10 ms, < 28 A for 100 μs
10 ms
10 ms
Analog Output (MSA141 module)
Current
4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA
Load impedance
< 600 W (wiring included)
Accuracy
0.50 %
(1) According to configuration.
(2) Relay outputs comply with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations).
68
110 / 240 V AC
-20 % +10 % (47.5 to 63 Hz)
< 6 VA
< 6 VA
< 15 VA
< 25 VA
< 15 A for first half-period
10 ms
10 ms
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Emission tests
Disturbing field emission
Conducted disturbance emission
Base Unit
Environmental Characteristics
Standard
IEC 60255-25
EN 55022
IEC 60255-25
EN 55022
Level / Class
Value
A
2
B
Immunity tests – Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency
IEC 60255-22-3
IEC 61000-4-3
ANSI C37.90.2 (1995)
IEC 60255-22-2
ANSI C37.90.3
IEC 61000-4-8
III
IV
10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
35 V/m ; 25 MHz - 1 GHz
8 kV air ; 6 kV contact
8 kV air ; 4 kV contact
30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (13 s)
Immunity tests – Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances
Fast transient bursts
IEC 60255-22-6
IEC 60255-22-4
IEC 61000-4-4
ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-12
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60255-11
III
Standard
Level / Class
Value
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-21-3
2
Fc
2
2
1 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
2 Hz - 13.2 Hz ; a = ±1 mm
10 Gn / 11 ms
2 Gn (horizontal axes)
1 Gn (vertical axes)
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-21-2
2
2
2
2 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
30 Gn / 11 ms
20 Gn / 16 ms
Standard
Level / Class
Value
Exposure to cold
IEC 60068-2-1
-25 °C (-13 °F)
Exposure to dry heat
IEC 60068-2-2
Continuous exposure to damp heat
Temperature variation with specified variation rate
IEC 60068-2-3
IEC 60068-2-14
Series 20: Ab
Series 40: Ad
Series 20: Bb
Series 40: Bd
Ca
Nb
Salt mist
Influence of corrosion/gaz test 2
IEC 60068-2-52
IEC 60068-2-60
Kb/2
C
Influence of corrosion/gaz test 4
IEC 60068-2-60
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
100 kHz damped oscillating wave
Surges
Voltage interruptions
Mechanical Robustness
A or B
IV
III
10 V
4 kV ; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV ; 5 kHz
4 kV ; 2.5 kHz
4 kV ; 2.5 kHz
2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD
2.5 kV MC and MD
2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD
2 kV MC ; 1 kV MD
Series 20: 100 %, 10 ms
Series 40: 100 %, 20 ms
In operation
Vibrations
Shocks
Earthquakes
De-energized
Vibrations
Shocks
Jolts
Climatic Withstand
In operation
In storage (3)
Exposure to cold
Exposure to dry heat
Continuous exposure to damp heat
+70 °C (+158 °F)
10 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 °C (104 °F)
–25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
5 °C/min (41 °F/min)
21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 °C (-13 °F);
0.5 ppm H2S ; 1 ppm SO2
21 days ; 75 % RH ; 25 °C ;
0.01 ppm H2S ; 0.2 ppm SO2 ;
0.02 ppm NO2; ; 0.01 ppm Cl2
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-3
Ab
Bb
Ca
-25 °C (-13 °F)
+70 °C (+158 °F)
56 days ; 93 % RH ; 40 °C (104 °F)
Standard
Level / Class
Value
Front panel tightness
IEC 60529
IP52
Other panels closed, except for
rear panel IP20
NEMA
IEC 60695-2-11
Type 12 with gasket supplied
Fire withstand
Safety
Enclosure safety tests
650 °C with glow wire (1562 °F)
Electrical safety tests
1.2/50 μs pulse wave
Power frequency dielectric withstand
Certification
IEC 60255-5
IEC 60255-5
5 kV (1)
2 kV 1 min (2)
European directives:
b 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
v 92/31/CEE Amendment
v 93/68/CEE Amendment
b 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive
v 93/68/CEE Amendment
UL UL508 - CSA C22.2 n° 14-95
File E212533
CSA
CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 / n° 94-M91 / n° 0.17-00
File 210625
(1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1kV in differential mode
(2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms
(3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.
Œ
Harmonized standard:
EN 50263
69
Base Unit
Sepam Series 20
Sepam S20, S23, T20, T23 and M20
Sepam B21 and B22
a
a
b
c
DE51822
2
DE52168
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
b
c
CCA634
Ia
Van
Ib
Vbn
Ic
Vcn
Vr
Ir
(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Connector
For Sepam
S20, S23, T20, T23 and
M20
For Sepam
B21 and B22
Type
Reference
Screw-type
CCA620
6.35 mm ring lugs
CCA622
4 mm ring lugs
CCA630, CCA634 for
connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs
CCA670, for connection of 3
LPCT sensors
CCT640
RJ45 plug
Screw-type
Green RJ45 plug
Black RJ45 plug
70
Wiring
b wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to
1 mm² (u AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm² wire
- DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm² wire
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires
v wire length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm
b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in)
b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(u AWG 24-12)
b stripped length: 6 mm
b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal
b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm
b wire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 IB-in)
Integrated with LPCT sensor
Same as wiring for the CCA620
CCA612
CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Base Unit
Sepam Series 40
DE52169
a
b
c
2
CCA634
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC
ARC OR BURNS
b Only qualified personnel should install
this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set
of instructions and checking the technical
characteristics of the device
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in
use
Ia
Van
Ib
Vbn
Ic
Vcn
Ir
Failure to follow these instructions will
result in death or serious injury.
(1) This type of connection allows the calculation of residual voltage.
(2) Accessory for bridging terminals 3 and 5 supplied with CCA626 and CCA627 connector.
Connector
Type
Reference
Wiring
Screw-type
CCA620
b wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to
1 mm² (u AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm² wire
- DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm² wire
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires
v wire length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm
6.35 mm ring lugs
CCA622
4 mm ring lugs
CCA630, CCA634, for
connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs
CCA670, for connection of 3
LPCT sensors
b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4 in)
b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(u AWG 24-12)
b stripped length: 6 mm
b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal
b tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 Nm
b wire cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 IB-in)
Integrated with LPCT sensor
RJ45 plug
Green RJ45 plug
CCA612
Black RJ45 plug
CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
Same as wiring for the CCA620
Same as wiring for the CCA622
Screw-type
6.35 mm ring lugs
CCA626
CCA627
71
Base Unit
Other Phase Current Input
Connection Schemes
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Variant 1: phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)
2
a
b
Description
Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
c
DE80144
CCA630/
CCA634
Ia
Ib
Ic
The measurement of the 3-phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (IN)
5 A CT or 1 A CT
Ia, Ib, Ic
1 A to 6250 A
Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs
b
Description
Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
c
DE80145
a
CCA630/
CCA634
Ia
Ib
Ic
The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the
phase current-based protection functions.
The phase current IB is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that Ir = 0.
This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (IN)
5 A CT or 1 A CT
Ia, Ic
1 A to 6250 A
Variant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors
b
Description
Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the
CCA670 connector. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed
and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position.
c
DE51826
a
CCA670
a
b
c
Ia
Ib
Ic
The measurement of the 3-phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (IN)
LPCT
Ia, Ib, Ic
25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter IN must be set 2 twice:
b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool
b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector
72
Base Unit
Other Residual Current Input
Connection Schemes
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Variant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3-phase currents
2
Description
Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3-phase currents Ia, Ib
and Ic, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.
See current input connection diagrams.
Parameters
Residual current
Sum of 3 Is
Rated residual current
INr = IN, CT primary current
Measuring range
0.1 to 40 INr
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT
(standard connection)
b
Description
Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral
systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.
c
DE80061
a
Ir
Parameters
Residual current
2 A rating CSH
5 A rating CSH
(Sepam series 40)
20 A rating CSH
Rated residual current
I Nr = 2 A
INr = 5 A
Measuring range
0.2 to 40 A
0.5 to 100 A
INr = 20 A
2 to 400 A
Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634
DE52520
a
b
c
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ir
DE80048
a
b
Description
Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs.
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT
Parameters
Residual current
1 A CT
1 A CT sensitive
5 A CT
5 A CT sensitive
Rated residual current
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN/10 (Sepam series 40)
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN/10 (Sepam series 40)
Measuring range
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
c
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ir
73
Base Unit
Other Residual Current Input Connection Schemes
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
b
Description
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to
measure residual current:
b connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH
primary
b connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH
primary.
b for Sepam series 40, the sensitivity can be multiplied by 10 using the "sensitive"
setting with INr = IN/10.
c
DE80115
a
Parameters
Residual current
1 A CT
1 A CT sensitive
5 A CT
5 A CT sensitive
turns
turns
DE80116
a
b
Rated residual current
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN/10 (Sepam series 40)
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN/10 (Sepam series 40)
Measuring range
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
0.1 to 20 INr
c
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ir
CT 1 A : 2 turns
CT 5 A : 4 turns
Variant 5: residual current measurement by zero sequence CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
a
b
c
DE51830
2
Variant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT
Ir
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV zero sequence CT with a ratio of
1/n (50 < n < 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.
This arrangement allows the continued use of existing zero sequence CTs on the
installation.
Parameters
Residual current
Rated residual current
Measuring range
0.1 to 20 INr
ACE990 - range 1
INr = Ik.n(1)
(0.00578 y k y 0.04)
0.1 to 20 INr
ACE990 - range 2
INr = Ik.n(1)
(0.0578 y k y 0.26316)
(1) n = number of zero sequence CT turns
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range
used by Sepam
74
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Voltage Inputs
Sepam Series 20
The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the
CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20 type B units. The CCT640 connector
contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs
and Sepam input circuits.
DE51831
Variant 1: measurement of 3 line-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
a
b
c
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs
Residual voltage
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Vr
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Sum of 3Vs
Functions available
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam)
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vr, V1, f
All
All
DE51832
Variant 2: measurement of 3 line-to-neutral voltages and residual voltage
a
b
c
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs
Residual voltage
Van
Functions available
Vbn
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam)
Vcn
Vr
Van, Vbn, Vcn
External VT
Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vr
Vab, Vbc, Vca, V1, f
All
All
DE51833
Variant 3: measurement of 2 line-to-line voltages
a
b
c
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs
Residual voltage
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Vr
Vab, Vbc
None
Functions available
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam)
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vca, V1, f
Vab, Vbc, Vca, V1, f
All except 59N, 27S
DE51834
Variant 4: measurement of 1 line-to-line voltage and residual voltage
a
b
c
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs
Residual voltage
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Vr
Vab
External VT
Functions available
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam)
Vab, Vr
f
Vab, Vr, f
All except 47, 27D, 27S
DE51835
Variant 5: measurement of 1 line-to-line voltage
a
b
c
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs
Residual voltage
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Vr
Vab
None
Functions available
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Measurements available
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam)
Vab
f
Vab, f
All except 47, 27D, 59N, 27S
75
2
Characteristics
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Voltage Inputs
Sepam Series 40
The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected directly
to the connector marked E . The 3 impedance matching and isolation transformers
are integrated in the Sepam series 40 base unit.
2
Variant 1: measurement of 3 line-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
a
DE51836
b
c
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting
Voltages measured
Values calculated
3V
3V sum
Van, Vbn, Vcn
Vab, Vbc, Vca, Vr, V1, V2, f
Measurements unavailable
Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
None
None
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Variant 2: measurement of 2 line-to-line voltages and residual voltage
a
DE51837
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Vab, Vbc
External VT
Vab, Vbc, Vr
Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, V1, V2, f
Measurements unavailable
Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
None
None
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Vab, Vbc
None
Vab, Vbc
Vca, V1, V2, f
Measurements unavailable
Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vr
67N/67NC, 59N
Variant 3: measurement of 2 line-to-line voltages
a
DE51838
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Variant 4: measurement of 1 line-to-line voltage and residual voltage
a
b
DE51839
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Vab
External VT
Vab, Vr
f
Measurements unavailable
Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, V1, V2
67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40, 27S
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting
Voltages measured
Values calculated
Vab
None
Vab
f
Measurements unavailable
Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vr,
V1, V2
67, 47, 27D, 32P, 32Q/40,
67N/67NC, 59N, 27S
Variant 5: measurement of 1 line-to-line voltage
a
DE51840
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
76
Sepam Series 80
Sepam Series 80
Sepam Series 80
78
Selection Table
78
Functions
80
Sensor Inputs
80
General Settings
81
Metering and Diagnosis
82
Description
Characteristics
82
87
Protection
88
Description
Trip Curves
Main Characteristics
Setting Ranges
88
94
96
97
Control and Monitoring
101
Description
Description of Predefined Functions
Adaptation of Predefined Functions Using the SFT2841 Software
Customized Functions Using Logipam
101
102
106
108
Characteristics
109
Base Unit
109
Presentation
Description
Technical Characteristics
Environmental Characteristics
Dimensions
109
113
115
116
117
Connection Diagrams
118
Base Unit
118
Sepam Series 80
Connection
Sepam B83
Sepam C86
Phase Current Inputs
Residual Current Inputs
118
119
120
121
122
123
Phase Voltage Inputs - Residual Voltage Input
125
Main Channels
Additional Channels for Sepam B83
Additional Channel for Sepam B80
Available Functions
125
126
127
128
77
Selection Table
Sepam Series 80
Substation
Protection
3
Phase overcurrent (1)
Ground fault/Sensitive ground
fault (1)
Breaker failure
Negative sequence/unbalance
Thermal overload for cables
Thermal overload for machines (1)
Thermal overload for capacitors
Capacitor bank unbalance
Restricted ground fault
Two-winding transformer
differential
Machine differential
Directional phase overcurrent (1)
Directional ground fault (1)
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive overpower
Directional active underpower
Phase undercurrent
Excessive starting time, locked
rotor
Starts per hour
Field loss (underimpedance)
Pole slip
Overspeed (2 set points) (2)
Underspeed (2 set points) (2)
Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Underimpedance
Inadvertent energization
Third harmonic undervoltage /
100 % stator ground fault
Overexcitation (V / Hz)
Positive sequence undercurrent
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or Ln)
Overvoltage (LL or Ln)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
Recloser (4 shots) (2)
Thermostat / Buchholz (2)
Temperature monitoring
(16 RTDs) (3)
Synchro-check (4)
ANSI Code
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
49RMS
49RMS
51C
64REF
87T
Motor
Generator
Bus
Cap.
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
87M
67
67N/67NC
32P
32Q
37P
37
48/51LR
66
40
78PS
12
14
50V/51V
21B
50/27
27TN/64G2
64G
24
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
81R
79
26/63
38/49T
Transformer
S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83 C86
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
v
v
1
1
1
v
v
1
1
1
v
v
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
v
v
2
1
1
2
1
1
v
v
2
1
1
2
1
1
v
v
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Circuit breaker / contactor control 94/69
v
v
v
v
Automatic transfer (AT) (2)
v
Load shedding / automatic restart
De-excitation
Genset shutdown
Capacitor step control (2)
v
v
v
Zone sequence interlocking (2)
68
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
Latching / acknowledgement
86
b
b
b
b
b
Annunciation
30
b
b
b
b
b
Switching of groups of settings
b
b
b
b
b
Adaptation using logic equations
v
v
v
v
Logipam programming (Ladder language)
v
The numbers indicate the number of relays available for each protection function.
b standard v options.
(1) Protection functions with two groups of settings.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules.
(3) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
Control and Monitoring
78
25
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
v
v
v
v
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
2
v
v
v
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
v
v
v
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
v
Selection Table
Sepam Series 80
Substation
Metering
Phase current Ia, Ib, Ic RMS
Measured residual current Ir, calculated IrΣ
Demand current Ia, Ib, Ic
Maximum demand current Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax
Measured residual current I’r
Voltage Vab, Vbc, Vac, Van, Vbn, Vcn
Residual voltage Vr
Positive sequence voltage V1 / rotation direction
Negative sequence voltage V2
Frequency
Active power P, Pa, Pb, Pc
Reactive power Q, Qa, Qb, Qc
Apparent power S, Sa, Sb, Sc
Maximum demand power Pmax, Qmax
Power factor (pf)
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh)
Active and reactive energy by pulse counting (2)
(± Wh, ± VARh)
Phase current I’a, I’b, I’c RMS
Calculated residual current I’rΣ
Voltage V’ab, V’a and frequency
Voltage V’ab, V’bc, V’ac, V’an, V’bn, V’cn, V’a, V’b
and frequency
Residual voltage V’r
Temperature (16 RTDs) (3)
Rotation speed (2)
Neutral point voltage VLnt
Network and Machine Diagnosis
Tripping context
Tripping current TripIa, TripIb, TripIc
Phase fault and ground fault trip counters
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I2
Harmonic distortion (thd), current and voltage Ithd,
Vthd
Phase displacement φr, φ’r, φrΣ
Phase displacement φa, φb, φc
Disturbance recording
Thermal capacity used
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping
Running hours counter / operating time
Starting current and time
Start block time
Number of starts before block
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current I’2
Differential current Idiffa, Idiffb, Idiffc
Through current Ita, Itb, Itc
Current phase displacement θ
Apparent positive sequence impedance Z1
Apparent line-to-line impedances Zab, Zbc, Zac
Third harmonic voltage, neutral point or residual
Difference in amplitude, frequency and phase of
voltages compared for synchro-check (4)
Capacitor unbalance current and capacitance
Switchgear Diagnosis
Transformer
Motor
Generator
Bus
S80 S81 S82 S84 T81 T82 T87 M81 M87 M88 G82 G87 G88 B80 B83
ANSI Code
CT / VT supervision
60/60FL
Trip circuit supervision (2)
74
Auxiliary power supply monitoring
Cumulative breaking current
Number of operations, operating time, charging time,
number of racking out operations (2)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
Modbus Communication, IEC 60 870-5-103, DNP3 or IEC 850
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Measurement readout (4)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Remote indication and events time tagging(4)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Remote control commands (4)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Remote protection setting (4)
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Disturbance recording data transfer (4)
b standard v options.
(2) According to parameter setting and optional MES120 input/output modules.
(3) With optional MET1482 temperature input modules.
(4) With optional MCS025 synchro-check module.
(5) With ACE9492, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP, ACE969FO or ECI850 communication interface.
b
b
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
b
v
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
79
3
Sensor Inputs
3
DE50583
Functions
Sepam Series 80
NO
VLLp VLLs
Sepam™ G88
3VLN/2VLL
IN
VLLN1
VLLN2
INr
Δ
Y
Ir
Sepam Series 80 has analog inputs that are connected to the measurement sensors
required for applications:
b main analog inputs, available on all types of Sepam Series 80:
v 3 phase current inputs la, lb, lc
v 1 residual current input lr
v 3 phase voltage inputs Van, Vbn, Vcn
v 1 residual voltage input Vr
b additional analog inputs, dependent on the type of Sepam:
v 3 additional phase current inputs l’a, l’b, l’c
v 1 additional residual current input l’r
v 3 additional phase voltage inputs V’an, V’bn, V’cn
v 1 additional residual voltage input V’r
The table below lists the analog inputs available according to the type of Sepam
Series 80.
I’B
I’N
VLnp VLns
VLnt
I’Nr
I’r
Sepam G88 sensor inputs
Phase current inputs
Residual current inputs
Unbalance current
inputs for capacitor steps
Phase voltage inputs
Main channel
Additional channels
Main channel
Additional channels
S80, S81, T81, T82, T87, M87,
S82, S84 M81, G82 M88, G87,
G88
B80
B83
C86
Ia, Ib, lc
Ia, lb, lc
Ia, lb, lc
Ia, lb, lc
Ia, lb, lc
lr
l’r
lr
l’r
lr
l’r
lr
lr
Ia, lb, lc
l’a, l’b, l’c
lr
l’r
l’a, l’b, l’c, l’r
Main channel
Van, Vbn, Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
Van, Vbn, Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
Van, Vbn, Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
Additional channels
Residual voltage inputs
Main channel
Additional channel
Vr
Vr
Vr
Van, Vbn, Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
Van, Vbn, Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
V’an or V’ab
V’an, V’bn, V’cn
or V’ab, V’bc
Vr (1)
Vr
V’r
Temperature inputs
T1 to T16
T1 to T16
(on MET1482 module)
Note: by extension, an additional measurement (current or voltage) is a value measured via an additional analog channel.
(1) Available with phase voltage Vab, Vbc.
80
Van, Vbn,
Vcn
or Vab, Vbc
Vr
T1 to T16
Functions
Sepam Series 80
General Settings
The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors that are
connected to Sepam. They determine the performance of the metering and protection
functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software “General
Characteristics”, “CT-VT Sensors” and “Particular characteristics” tabs.
General Settings
IN, I’N
Selection
Value
2 or 3 1 A / 5 A CTs
3 LPCTs
Unbalance current sensor rating (capacitor application) CT 1 A / 2 A / 5 A
Base current, according to rated power of equipment
Base current on additional channels
Applications with transformer
(not adjustable)
Other applications
Rated residual current
Sum of 3 phase currents
CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT
1 A/5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT
Zero sequence CT + ACE990 (the zero sequence CT
ratio 1/n must be such that 50 y n y 1500)
Rated primary line-to-line voltage (VLnp: rated primary
line-to-neutral voltage VLnp = VLLp/3)
1 A to 6250 A
25 A to 3150 A (1)
1 A to 30 A
0.2 to 1.3 IN
I’B = IB x VLna/VLnb
I’B = IB
See IN(I’N) rated phase current
2 A or 20 A rating
1 A to 6250 A
According to current monitored
and use of ACE990
220 V to 250 kV
VLLs,
V’LLs
Rated secondary line-to-line voltage
VLLsr,
V’LLsr
VLnp
Secondary zero sequence voltage relative to primary
zero sequence voltage VLLp/3
Neutral point voltage transformer primary voltage
(generator application)
Neutral point voltage transformer secondary voltage
(generator application)
Rated frequency
Phase rotation direction
Demand interval (for demand current and maximum
demand current and power)
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter
90 to 230 V
90 to 120 V
90 to 120 V
90 to 230 V
VLns/3 or VLns/3
I’N
IB
I’B
INr, I’Nr
VLLp,
V’LLp
VLns
fN
P
VLn1
VLn2
I N1
I N2
ωN
R
Rated phase current
(sensor primary current)
Rated transformer power
Rated winding 1 voltage
(main channels: I)
Rated winding 2 voltage
(additional channels: I’)
Rated winding 1 current (not adjustable)
Rated winding 2 current (not adjustable)
Transformer vector shift
Rated speed (motor, generator)
Number of pulses per rotation (for speed acquisition)
Zero speed set point
Number of capacitor steps
Connection of capacitor steps
Capacitor step ratio
3 VTs: Van, Vbn, Vcn
2 VTs: Vab, Vbc
1 VT: Vab
1 VT: Van
220 V to 250 kV
57.7 V to 133 V
50 Hz or 60 Hz
1-2-3 oru 1-3-2
5, 10, 15, 30, 60 min
Increments active energy
Increments reactive energy
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
(1) IN values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
0.1 kWh to 5 MWh
0.1 kVARh to 5 MVARh
100 kVA to 999 MVA
220 V to 220 kV
220 V to 400 kV
IN1 = P/(3 VLn1)
IN2 = P/(3 VLn2)
0 to 11
100 to 3600 rpm
1 to 1800 (ωN x R/60 y 1500)
5 to 20 % of ωN
1 to 4
Wye / Delta
1
1, 2
1, 2, 3, 4
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8
81
3
Functions
Sepam Series 80
3
Metering
Sepam is a precision metering unit. All the metering and
diagnosis data used for commissioning and required
for the operation and maintenance of your equipment
are available locally or remotely, expressed in the units
concerned (A, V, W, etc.).
Phase Current
RMS current for each phase, factoring harmonics up to
the 13th level. Different types of sensors may be used to
meter phase current:
b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT type current sensors
Residual Current
Four types of residual current values are available
depending on the type of Sepam and sensors connected
to it:
b two residual currents IrΣ and I’rΣ, calculated by the
vector sum of the 3 phase currents
b two measured residual currents Ir and I’r.
Different types of sensors may be used to measure
residual current:
b CSH120 or CSH200 specific zero sequence CT
b conventional 1 A or 5 A current transformer with
CSH30 interposing ring CT
b any zero sequence CT with an ACE990 interface
Demand Current and Maximum Demand
currents
Demand and maximum demand currents are calculated
according to the three phase currents Ia, Ib, and Ic:
b demand current is calculated over an adjustable
period of 5 to 60 minutes
b maximum demand current is the greatest demand
current and indicates the current drawn by maximum
loads.
Maximum demand currents can be cleared
Voltage and Frequency
The following measurements are available according to
the voltage sensors connected:
b line-to-neutral voltages Van, Vbn, Vcn and V’an, V’bn,
V’cn
b line-to-line voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca and V’ab, V’bc,
V’ca
b residual voltage Vr, V’r or neutral point voltage VNt
b positive sequence voltage V1, V’1 and negative
sequence voltage V2, V’2
b frequency measured on the main and additional
voltage channels.
Power
Powers are calculated according to the phase currents
Ia, Ib and Ic:
b active power
b reactive power
b apparent power
b power factor (pf).
According to the sensors used, power calculations may
be based on the two or three wattmeter method. The
two wattmeter method is only accurate when there is
no residual current and it is not applicable if the neutral
is distributed. The three wattmeter method accurately
calculates 3-phase and phase by phase powers in
all cases, regardless of whether or not the neutral is
distributed.
82
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Maximum Demand Powers
The greatest demand active and reactive power values are calculated over the same
period as the demand current. The maximum demand powers may be cleared.
Energy
b Four accumulated energies are calculated by using voltages and phase currents
Ia, Ib, and Ic. They are used to measure active energy and reactive energy in both
directions
b 1 to 4 additional accumulated energy meters can be used to acquire active or
reactive energy pulses from external meters
Temperature
Accurate measurement of temperature inside equipment fitted with Pt100, Ni100
or Ni120 type RTDs, connected to the optional remote MET1482 module.
Rotation Speed
Rotation speed is calculated by counting the pulses transmitted by a proximity
sensor at each passage of a cam driven by the rotation of the motor or generator
shaft. Acquisition of pulses on a logic input.
Phasor Diagram
A phasor diagram is displayed by SFT2841 software and the mimic-based UMI
to check cabling and assist in the setting and commissioning of directional and
differential protection functions.
According to the connected sensors, all current and voltage information can be
selected for display in vector form.
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Network Diagnosis Assistance
Sepam provides network power quality metering functions, and all the data on network
disturbances detected by Sepam. The data are recorded for analytical purposes.
Tripping Context
Storage of tripping currents and Ir, I2, Vab, Vbn, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vr, V1, V2, F,
P, Q, Idiff, It and VNt values when tripping occurs. The values for the last five trips are
stored.
Tripping Current
Storage of the 3 phase currents and ground fault current at the time of the last Sepam
trip command, to indicate fault current. The values are stored in the tripping contexts.
Number of Trips
2 trip counters:
b number of phase fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50/51,
50V/51V and 67 protection functions
b number of ground fault trips, incremented by each trip triggered by ANSI 50N/51 and
67N/67NC protection functions.
Negative Sequence/Unbalance
Negative sequence component of phase currents Ia, Ib, and Ic (and I’a, I’b and I’c),
indicating the degree of unbalance in the power supplied to the protected equipment.
Total harmonic Distortion
Two THD values calculated to assess network power quality, taking into account
harmonics up to number 13:
b current THD, calculated according to Ia
b voltage THD, calculated according to Van or Vab.
Phase Displacement
b phase displacement φa, φb, φc between phase currents la, lb, lc and voltages Van,
Vbn, Vcn respectively
b phase displacement φr between residual current and residual voltage.
Disturbance Recording
Recording triggered by user-set events:
b all sampled values of measured currents and voltages
b status of all logic inputs and outputs logic data: instantaneous, etc.
Recording Characteristics
Number of recordings in COMTRADE format
Adjustable from 1 to 19
Total duration of a recording
Adjustable from 1 to 11 s
Number of samples per period
12 or 36
Duration of recording prior to occurrence of the event
Adjustable from 0 to 99 periods
Maximum Recording Capability
Network Frequency
50 Hz
12 Samples
per Period
22 s
36 Samples
per Period
7s
60 Hz
18 s
6s
Voltage Comparison for Synchro-Check
For the synchro-check function, the MCS025 module continuously measures the
amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages to be checked.
Out-of-Sync Context
Storage of amplitude, frequency and phase differences between the 2 voltages
measured by the MCS025 module when a closing command is blocked by the synchrocheck function.
83
3
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Machine Diagnosis Assistance
3
Sepam assists facility managers by providing:
b data on the operation of their machines
b predictive data to optimize process management
b useful data to facilitate protection function setting and implementation
Thermal Capacity Used
Equivalent temperature buildup in the machine is calculated by the thermal overload
protection function. This value is displayed as a percentage of rated thermal capacity.
Remaining Operating Time before Overload Tripping
Predictive data is calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The time is
used by facility managers to optimize process management in real time by deciding to:
b interrupt according to procedures
b continue operation with blocking of thermal protection on overloaded machine.
Waiting Time after Overload Tripping
Predictive data is calculated by the thermal overload protection function. The purpose
of waiting time is to avoid further tripping of thermal overload protection that is caused
by premature re-energizing of insufficiently cooled down equipment.
Running Hours Counter/Operating Time
Equipment is considered to be running whenever a phase current is over 0.1 IB.
Cumulative operating time is given in hours.
Motor Starting/Overload Current and Time
A motor is considered to be starting or overloaded when a phase current is over
1.2 IB. For each start / overload, Sepam stores:
b maximum current drawn by the motor
b starting / overload time.
The values are stored until the following start / overload.
Number of Starts before Block/Start Block Time
This indicates the number of starts still allowed by the starts per hour protection
function. If the number is zero, there is only one start per hour allowed.
Differential and Through Current
Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of ANSI 87T and 87M differential
protection functions.
Current Phase Displacement
Phase shift between the main phase currents and additional phase currents to facilitate
implementation of ANSI 87T differential protection function.
Apparent Positive Sequence Impedance Z1
This value is calculated to facilitate implementing the underimpedance field loss
protection (ANSI 40).
Apparent Line-to-line Impedances Zab, Zbc, Zac
Values calculated to facilitate the implementation of the backup underimpedance
protection function (ANSI 21B).
Third Harmonic Neutral Point or Residual Voltage
Values measured to facilitate the implementation of the third harmonic undervoltage /
100 % stator ground fault protection function (ANSI 27TN/64G2).
Capacitance
Measurement, for each phase, of the total capacitance of the connected capacitor
bank steps. This measurement is used to monitor the condition of the capacitors.
Capacitor Unbalance Current
Measurement of the unbalance current for each capacitor bank step. This
measurement is possible when the steps are connected in a double wye
arrangement.
84
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Switchgear Diagnosis
Assistance
ANSI 60/60FL - CT/VT Supervision
NO
NO
Used to monitor the entire metering chain:
b CT and VT sensors
b connection
b Sepam analog inputs
Monitoring includes:
b consistency checking of currents and voltages
measured
b blown fuse indication of phase or residual voltage
transformer.
If current or voltage measurement data is lost, the
assigned protection functions can be blocked to avoid
nuisance tripping.
3
To detect the health of the trip and close circuits, Sepam monitors:
b shunt trip coil connection
b closing coil connection
b matching of breaking device open/closed position contacts
b execution of breaking device open and close commands
The trip and closing circuits are only supervised when connected as shown below.
DE51773
Switchgear diagnosis data give facility managers
information on:
b mechanical condition of breaking device
b Sepam auxiliaries and assist them for preventive and
curative switchgear maintenance actions
The data are to be compared to switchgear
manufacturer data.
ANSI 74 - Trip/Closing Circuit Supervision
NO
Connection for shunt trip coil
monitoring.
Connection for undervoltage
trip coil monitoring.
Connection for closing circuit
supervision
Auxiliary Power Supply Monitoring
The voltage rating of Sepam’s auxiliary supply should be set between 24 V DC and 250
V DC. If the auxiliary supply drifts, two alarms may be triggered:
b high set point alarm, adjustable from 105 % to 150 % of rated supply (maximum
275 V)
b low set point alarm, adjustable from 60 % to 95 % of rated supply (minimum 20 V).
Cumulative Breaking Current Monitoring
Six cumulative currents are proposed to assess interrupting device pole condition:
b total cumulative breaking current
b cumulative interrupting current between 0 and 2 IN
b cumulative interrupting current between 2 IN and 5 IN
b cumulative interrupting current between 5 IN and 10 IN
b cumulative interrupting current between 10 IN and 40 IN
b cumulative interrupting current > 40 IN.
Each time the interrupting device opens, the interrupting current is added to the
cumulative total and to the appropriate range of cumulative interrupting current.
Cumulative interrupting current is given in (kA)².
An alarm can be generated when the total cumulative interrupting current exceeds a
set point.
Number of Operations
Cumulative number of opening operations performed by the interrupting device.
Circuit Breaker Operating Time and Charging Time
Number of Rackouts
Used to assess the condition of the interrupting device operating mechanism.
85
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Metering and Diagnosis
Description
Sepam Self-Diagnosis
3
Sepam includes a number of self-tests carried out in the base unit and optional
modules. The purpose of the self-tests is to:
b detect internal problems that may cause nuisance tripping or not tripping when
required
b put Sepam in fail-safe position to avoid any unwanted operation
b alert the facility manager of the need for maintenance operations
Internal Failure
Two categories of internal failures are monitored:
b major failures: Sepam shutdown (to fail-safe position).
The protection functions are blocked, the output relays are forced to drop out and the
“Watchdog” output indicates Sepam shutdown
b minor failures: downgraded Sepam operation
Sepam’s main functions are operational and equipment protection is ensured.
Battery Monitoring
Monitoring of battery voltage to guarantee data is saved in the event of an outage.
A battery with low charge generates an alarm.
Detection of Plugged Connectors
The system checks that the current or voltage sensors are plugged in. A missing
connector is a major failure.
Configuration Checking
The system checks that the optional modules configured are present and working
correctly.
The absence or malfunction of a remote module is considered a minor failure. The
absence or failure of a logic input/output module is considered a major failure.
86
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Functions
Metering
Phase current
Residual current
Metering and Diagnosis
Characteristics
Measurement range
Accuracy (1)
MSA141
±0.5 %
±1 %
±1 %
±0.5 %
±0.5 %
±0.5 %
b
b
b
Demand current
Maximum demand current
Line-to-line voltage
Main channels (VLL)
0.02 to 40 IN
0.005 to 40 IN
0.005 to 20 INr
0.02 to 40 IN
0.02 to 40 IN
0.05 to 1.2 VLLp
Additional channels (VLL’)
0.05 to 1.2 VLLp
±1 %
Line-to-neutral voltage
Main channels (VLn)
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
±0.5 %
Additional channels (VLn’)
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
±1 %
0.015 to 3 VLnp
0.015 to 3 VLnp
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
0.05 to 1.2 VLnp
25 to 65 Hz
45 to 55 Hz (fn = 50 Hz)
55 to 65 Hz (fn = 60 Hz)
0.008 Sn to 999 MW
0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR
0.008 Sn to 999 MVA
0.008 Sn to 999 MW
0.008 Sn to 999 MVAR
-1 to + 1 (CAP/IND)
0 to 2.1 x 108 MWh
0 to 2.1 x 108 MVARh
-22 °F to +392 °F
-30 °C to +200 °C
0 to 7200 rpm
±1 %
±1 %
±2 %
±2 %
±0.01 Hz
±0.05 Hz
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±1 %
±0.01
±1 % ±1 digit
±1 % ±1 digit
±1.8 °F from +68 to +384 °F
±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
±1 rpm
0.02 to 40 In
0 to 65535
1 to 500 % of IB
0 to 100 %
0 to 100 %
0 to 359°
0 to 359°
±5 %
±2 %
±1 %
±1 %
±2°
±2°
0 to 1.2 VLLsync1
0 to 10 Hz
0 to 359°
±1 %
±0.5 Hz
±2°
Residual voltage
Neutral point voltage
Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage
Frequency
Calculated
Measured
Main channels (f)
Additional channels (f’)
Active power (total or per phase)
Reactive power (total or per phase)
Apparent power (total or per phase)
Maximum demand active power
Maximum demand reactive power
Power factor
Calculated active energy
Calculated reactive energy
Temperature
Rotation speed
Machine Operating Assistance
Thermal capacity used
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping
Running hours counter / operating time
Starting current
Starting time
Number of starts before blocking
Start block time
Differential current
Through current
Phase displacement θa, θb, θc (between I and I’)
Apparent impedance Z1, Zab, Zbc, Zac
Third harmonic neutral point voltage
Third harmonic residual voltage
Capacitance
Capacitor unbalance current
0 to 800 %
(100 % for phase I = IB)
0 to 999 min
0 to 999 min
0 to 65535 hours
1.2 IB to 40 IN
0 to 300 s
0 to 60
0 to 360 min
0.015 to 40 IN
0.015 to 40 IN
0 to 359°
0 to 200 kw
0.2 to 30 % of VLnp
0.2 to 90 % of VLnp
0 to 30 F
0.02 to 40 I’N
±1 %
±1 min
±1 min
±1 % or ±0.5 h
±5 %
±300 ms
v
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
b
vv
vv
b
v
v
vv
v
v
b
vv
vv
v
v
±1 min
±1 %
±1 %
±2°
±5 %
±1 %
±1 %
±5 %
±5 %
Switchgear Diagnosis Assistance
Cumulative breaking current
0 to 65535 kA²
Auxiliary supply
24 V DC to 250 V DC
Number of operations
0 to 4 x 109
Operating time
20 to 100 s
Charging time
1 to 20 s
Number of rackouts
0 to 65535
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup
v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage, even without battery
v saved by battery in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical accuracy at IN or VLLp, pf > 0.8.
3
b
Network Diagnosis Assistance
Tripping context
Tripping current
Number of trips
Negative sequence / unbalance
Total harmonic distortion, current
Total harmonic distortion, voltage
Phase displacement φr (between Vr and Ir)
Phase displacement φa, φb, φc (between V and I)
Disturbance recording
Amplitude difference
Frequency difference
Phase difference
Out-of-sync context
Saving
±10 %
±4 V or ±10 %
±1 ms
±0.5 s
-
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
87
Functions
Sepam Series 80
3
Protection
Description
Current Protection Functions
ANSI 50/51 - Phase Overcurrent
This function provides line-to-line short-circuit
protection. There are two modes:
b overcurrent protection sensitive to the highest phase
current measured
b machine differential protection sensitive to the highest
differential phase currents obtained in self-balancing
schemes
Characteristics
b two groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized
IDMT curves) or customized curve
b with or without timer hold
b tripping confirmed or unconfirmed, according to
parameter setting:
v unconfirmed tripping: standard
v tripping confirmed by negative sequence
overvoltage protection (ANSI 47, unit 1), as backup
for distant
2-phase short-circuits
b tripping confirmed by undervoltage protection
(ANSI 27, unit 1), as backup for line-to-line shortcircuits in networks with low short-circuit power.
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Ground Fault
Ground fault protection is based on measured or
calculated residual current values:
b ANSI 50N/51N: residual current calculated or
measured by 3 phase current sensors
b ANSI 50G/51G: residual current measured directly by
a specific sensor
Characteristics
b two groups of settings
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 17 standardized
IDMT curves) or customized curve
b with or without timer hold
b second harmonic restraint to ensure stability during
transformer energizing, activated by parameter
setting
ANSI 50BF - Breaker Failure
If breaker fails to trip when signaled, as detected by the
fault current persisting, this backup protection sends a
tripping command to the upstream (radial) or adjacent
(bi-directional) breaker(s).
ANSI 46 - Negative Sequence/Unbalance
This function provides protection against phase
unbalance detected by measuring negative sequence
current.
b sensitive protection to detect 2-phase faults at the
ends of long lines
b protection of equipment against temperature buildup, caused by an unbalanced power supply, phase
inversion or loss of phase, and against phase current
unbalance
Characteristics
b 1 definite time (DT) curve
b 9 IDMT curves: 4 IEC curves and 3 IEEE curves, 1
ANSI curve in RI² and 1 specific Schneider curve
88
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal Overload
This is protection against thermal damage caused by overloads on:
b machines (transformers, motors or generators)
b cables
b capacitors
The thermal capacity used is calculated according to a mathematical model which
takes into account:
b current RMS values
b ambient temperature
b negative sequence current, a cause of motor rotor temperature rise.
The “thermal capacity used” calculations may be used to determine predictive data
for process control assistance. The protection may be blocked by a logic input when
required by process control conditions.
Thermal Overload for Machines - Characteristics
b two groups of settings (e.g. for alarm / trip for two speed motor)
v one adjustable alarm set point for each group
v one adjustable tripping set point for each group
b adjustable initial thermal capacity used setting, to adapt protection characteristics to
fit manufacturer’s thermal withstand curves
b equipment heating and cooling time constants.
The cooling time constant may be calculated automatically based on measurement of
the equipment temperature by a sensor.
Thermal Overload for Cables - Characteristics
b one group of settings
b cable current carrying capacity, which determines alarm and trip set points
b cable heating and cooling time constants.
Thermal Overload for Capacitors - Characteristics
b one group of settings
b alarm current, which determines the alarm set point
b overload current, which determines the tripping set point
b hot tripping time and current setting, which determine a point on the tripping curve.
ANSI 51C - Capacitor Bank Unbalance
Detection of capacitor step internal faults by measuring the unbalance current flowing
between the two neutral points of a step connected in a double wye arrangement. Four
unbalance currents can be measured to protect up to 4 steps.
Characteristics
b two set points per step
b definite time (DT) curve.
Protection
Description
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Recloser
Differential Protection Functions
ANSI 79
ANSI 64REF - Restricted Ground Fault Differential
Automation device used to limit down time after tripping
due to transient or semi-permanent faults on overhead
lines. The recloser commands automatic reclosing of
the interrupting device after the time delay required to
restore the insulation has elapsed. Recloser operation
is easy to adapt for different operating modes by
parameter setting.
Detection of line-to-ground faults on 3-phase windings with grounded neutral, by
comparison of residual current calculated from the 3 phase currents and residual
current measured at the neutral point.
Characteristics
b 1 to 4 reclosing shots, each shot has an adjustable
delay before closing time
b adjustable, independent reclose time and blocking
reclosing operation until delay time as expired.
b shot activation linked to instantaneous or timedelayed short-circuit protection function (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC) outputs by parameter
setting
b blocking/locking out of recloser by logic input.
Synchro-Check
ANSI 25
This function checks the voltages upstream and
downstream of a circuit breaker and allows closing when
the differences in amplitude, frequency and phase are
within authorized limits.
Characteristics
b adjustable and independent set points for differences
in voltage, frequency and phase
b adjustable lead time to take into account the circuitbreaker closing time
b 5 possible operating modes to take no-voltage
conditions into account.
3
DE51774
Ia Ib Ic
INt
Characteristics
b instantaneous tripping
b percentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point
b more sensitive than transformer or machine differential protection.
ANSI 87T - Transformer and Transformer- Machine Unit
Differential (two windings)
Line-to-line short-circuit protection of two-winding transformers or transformermachine units. Protection based on phase by phase comparison of the primary and
secondary currents with:
b amplitude and phase correction of the currents in each winding according to the
transformer vector shift and the voltage values set
b clearance of zero sequence current from the primary and secondary windings
(suitable for all grounding systems).
Characteristics
b instantaneous tripping
b adjustable high set point for fast tripping for high level faults, with no restraint
b percentage-based characteristic with two adjustable slopes and adjustable low set
point
b restraint based on percentage of harmonics. These restraints prevent nuisance
tripping during transformer energizing, during faults outside the zone that provoke
saturation of the current transformers and during operation of a transformer supplied
with excessive voltage (overexcitation).
v self-adapting neural network restraint: this restraint analyzes the percentage of
the 2nd and 5th harmonics as well as differential and through currents
v restraint based on the percentage of the 2nd harmonic per phase or total
v restraint based on the percentage of the 5th harmonic per phase or total.
Self-adapting restraint is exclusive with respect to restraints on the percentage of the
2nd harmonic or on the percentage of the 5th harmonic.
b restraint on energization. This restraint, based on the magnetizing current of the
transformer or on a logic equation or Logipam, ensures stability of transformers that
have low harmonic percentages on energization
b fast restraint upon loss of sensor.
ANSI 87M - Machine Differential
Line-to-line short-circuit protection, based on phase by phase comparison of the
currents on motor and generator windings.
Characteristics
b instantaneous tripping
b fixed high set point for fast tripping for high level faults, with no restraint
b percentage-based characteristic with fixed slope and adjustable low set point
b tripping restraint according to percentage characteristic activated by detection of:
v external fault or machine starting
v sensor saturation or disconnection
v transformer energizing (2nd harmonic restraint)
89
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Protection
Description
Directional Current Protection
3
ANSI 67 - Directional Phase Overcurrent
This function provides line-to-line short-circuit protection, with selective tripping
according to fault current direction. It comprises a phase overcurrent function
associated with direction detection, and picks up if the phase overcurrent function in the
chosen direction (line or bus) is activated for at least one of the three phases.
DE51841
Characteristics
b two groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b choice of tripping direction
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized
curve
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to loss of polarization voltage
at the time of the fault
b with or without timer hold
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional Ground Fault
This function provides ground fault protection, with selective tripping according to fault
current direction. There are two types of operation:
b type 1, projection
b type 2, according to the magnitude of the residual current phasor
ANSI 67N/67NC Type 1
Directional ground fault protection for impedance, isolated or compensated neutral
systems, based on the projection of measured residual current.
DE51842
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 1 protection
(characteristic angle q0 ¼ 0°).
Type 1 Characteristics
There are two groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) curve
b choice of tripping direction
b characteristic projection angle
b no timer hold
b with voltage memory to make the protection insensitive to recurrent faults in
compensated neutral systems
ANSI 67N/67NC Type 2
Directional overcurrent protection for impedance and solidly grounded systems, based
on measured or calculated residual current. It comprises an ground fault function
associated with direction detection, and picks up if the ground fault function in the
chosen direction (line or bus) is activated.
Type 2 Characteristics
b two groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized IDMT curves) or customized
curve
b choice of tripping direction
b with or without timer hold
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 2 protection
(characteristic angle q0 ¼ 0°).
ANSI 67N/67NC Type 3
DE52064
Directional overcurrent protection for distribution networks in which the neutral
grounding system varies according to the operating mode, based on measured
residual current. It comprises an ground fault function associated with direction
detection (angular sector tripping zone defined by 2 adjustable angles), and picks up if
the ground fault function in the chosen direction (line or bus) is activated.
This protection function complies with the Enel DK5600 specification.
Tripping characteristic of ANSI 67N/67NC type 3 protection.
90
Type 3 Characteristics
b two groups of settings
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT) curve
b choice of tripping direction
b no timer hold
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Protection
Description
Directional Power Protection
Functions
Machine Protection Functions
3
ANSI 37 - Phase Undercurrent
ANSI 32P - Directional Active Overpower
Protection of pumps against the consequences of a loss of priming by the detection
of motor no-load operation. It is sensitive Ia below set point, remains stable during
breaker tripping and may be blocked by a logic input.
Two-way protection based on calculated active power,
for the following applications:
b active overpower protection to detect overloads and
allow load shedding
b reverse active power protection:
v against generators running like motors when the
generators consume active power
v against motors running like generators when the
motors supply active power.
ANSI 48/51LR - Locked Rotor/Excessive Starting Time
Protection of motors against overheating caused by:
b excessive motor starting time due to overloads (conveyor) or insufficient supply
voltage.
The reacceleration of a motor that is not shut down, indicated by a logic input, may be
considered as starting.
b locked rotor due to motor load (e.g. crusher):
v in normal operation, after a normal start
v directly upon starting, before the detection of excessive starting time, with
detection of locked rotor by a zero speed detector connected to a logic input, or by
the underspeed function.
ANSI 32Q - Directional Reactive
Overpower
Two-way protection based on calculated reactive power
to detect field loss on synchronous machines:
b reactive overpower protection for motors which
consume more reactive power with field loss
b reverse reactive overpower protection for generators
which consume reactive power with field loss.
ANSI 66 - Starts per Hour
Protection against motor overheating caused by:
b too frequent starts: motor energizing is blocked when the maximum allowable
number of starts is reached, after counting of:
v starts per hour (or adjustable period)
v consecutive motor hot or cold starts (reacceleration of a motor that is not shut
down, indicated by a logic input, may be counted as a start)
b starts too close together in time: motor re-energizing after a shutdown is only allowed
after an adjustable waiting time.
ANSI 37P - Directional Active Underpower
Two-way protection based on calculated active power
Checking of active power flows:
b to adapt the number of parallel sources to fit the
network load power demand
b to create an isolated system in an installation with its
own generating unit.
ANSI 40 - Field Loss (Underimpedance)
Protection of synchronous machines against field loss, based on the calculation of
positive sequence impedance on the machine terminals or transformer terminals in the
case of transformer-machine units.
DE51843
Characteristics
b two circular characteristics defined by reactances Xa, Xb and Xc
2 circular tripping characteristics of ANSI 40 protection.
b tripping when the machine’s positive sequence impedance enters one of the circular
characteristics.
b definite (DT) time delay for each circular characteristic
b setting assistance function included in SFT2841 software to calculate the values
of Xa, Xb and Xc according to the electrical characteristics of the machine (and
transformer, when applicable).
91
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Characteristics
b circular characteristic centered at origin defined by adjustable set point Zs
Protection against loss of synchronism on synchronous
machines, based on calculated active power. There are
two types of operation:
b tripping according to the equal-area criterion,
time-delayed
b tripping according to power swing (number of active
power swings):
v suitable for generators capable of withstanding high
electrical and mechanical constraints
v to be set as a number of rotations.
The two types of operation may be used independently
or at the same time.
DE51844
ANSI 78PS - Pole Slip
ANSI 12 - Overspeed
Detection of machine overspeed, based on the speed
calculated by pulse-counting, to detect synchronous
generator racing due to loss of synchronism, or for
process monitoring, for example.
Circular tripping characteristic of ANSI 21B protection.
b time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping when one of the three apparent impedances
enters the circular tripping characteristic
ANSI 14 - Underspeed
ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent Energization
Machine speed monitoring based on the speed
calculated by pulse-counting:
b detection of machine underspeed after starting, for
process monitoring, for example
b zero speed data for detection of locked rotor upon
starting.
This function provides for checking the generator starting sequence in order to detect
the inadvertent energization of generators that are shut down (a generator which is
energized when shut down runs like a motor). This consists of instantaneous phase
overcurrent protection confirmed by a time-delayed undervoltage protection function.
ANSI 64G - 100 % Stator Ground Fault
This function provides protection of generators with grounded neutral against lineto-ground insulation faults in stator windings. This function can be used to protect
generators connected to step-up transformers. 100 % stator ground fault is a
combination of two protection functions:
b ANSI 59N/64G1: neutral voltage displacement, protection of 85 % to 90 % of the
stator winding, terminal end.
b ANSI 27TN/64G2: third harmonic undervoltage, protection of 10 % to 20 % of the
stator winding, neutral point end.
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-Restrained
Overcurrent
Line-to-line short-circuit protection, for generators. The
current tripping set point is voltage-adjusted in order to
be sensitive to faults close to the generator which cause
voltage drops and lowers the short-circuit current.
Characteristics
b instantaneous or time-delayed tripping
b definite time (DT), IDMT (choice of 16 standardized
IDMT curves) or customized curve
b with or without timer hold.
DE50099
3
Protection
Description
ANSI 21B - Underimpedance
Line-to-line short-circuit protection, for generators,
based on the calculation of apparent line-to-line
impedance.
Zab = Vab
Ib - Ia
apparent impedance between phases a and b.
Area of the generator’s stator winding associated with the ANSI 59N and ANSI 27TN functions.
ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third Harmonic Undervoltage
Protection of generators with grounded neutral against line-to-ground insulation faults,
by the detection of a reduction of third harmonic residual voltage. Protects the 10 to
20 % of the stator winding, neutral point end, not protected by the ANSI 59N/64G1
function, neutral voltage displacement.
Characteristics
b choice of two tripping principles, according to the sensors used:
v fixed third harmonic undervoltage set point
v adaptive neutral and terminal third harmonic voltage comparator set point
b time-delayed definite time (DT) tripping.
ANSI 26/63 - Thermostat/Buchholz
Protection of transformers against temperature rise and internal faults via logic inputs
linked to devices integrated in the transformer.
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature Monitoring
This protection detects abnormal temperature build-up by measuring the temperature
inside equipment fitted with sensors:
b transformer: protection of primary and secondary windings
b motor and generator: protection of stator windings and bearings.
Characteristics
b 16 Pt100, NI100 or Ni120 type RTDs
92
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Protection
Description
Voltage Protection Functions
Frequency Protection Functions
ANSI 24 - Overexcitation (V/Hz)
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Protection which detects overexcitation of transformer
or generator magnetic circuits by calculating the ratio
between the greatest line-to-neutral or line-to-line
voltage divided by the frequency.
Detection of abnormally high frequency compared to the rated frequency, to monitor
power supply quality.
Characteristics
b machine tie breaker to be set up
b definite time (DT) or IDMT time delays (choice of three
curves)
ANSI 27D - Positive Sequence
Undervoltage
Protection of motors against faulty operation due
to insufficient or unbalanced network voltage, and
detection of reverse rotation direction.
ANSI 27R - Remnant Undervoltage
Protection used to check that remnant voltage sustained
by rotating machines has been cleared before allowing
the bus supplying the machines to be re-energized, to
avoid electrical and mechanical transients.
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage
Protection of motors against voltage sags or detection
of abnormally low network voltage to trigger automatic
load shedding or source transfer. Works with line-to-line
or line-to-neutral voltage, each voltage being monitored
separately.
3
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
This function allows for detecting abnormally low frequency compared to the rated
frequency, to monitor power supply quality. It is activated by parameter setting.
This protection can be used for overall tripping or load shedding. Protection stability is
ensured if the main source is lost and there is a presence of remnant voltage. This is
accomplished by a restraint in the event of a continuous frequency decrease.
ANSI 81R - Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
This protection function is used for fast disconnect of a generator or load shedding
control. It is based on the frequency variation calculation. It is insensitive to transient
voltage disturbances and therefore more stable than a phase-shift protection function.
Disconnection
In installations with autonomous production means connected to a utility, the "rate of
change of frequency" protection function is used to detect loss of the main system in
view of opening the incoming circuit breaker to:
b protect the generators from a reconnection without checking synchronization
b avoid supplying loads outside the installation.
Load Shedding
The "rate of change of frequency" protection function is used for load shedding in
combination with the underfrequency protection to:
b either accelerate shedding in the event of a large overload
b or block shedding following a sudden drop in frequency due to a problem that should
not be solved by shedding
Characteristics
b definite time (DT) curve
b IDMT curve
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage
Detection of abnormally high network voltage or
checking for sufficient voltage to enable source transfer.
Works with line-to-line or line-to-neutral voltage, each
voltage being monitored separately.
ANSI 59N - Neutral Voltage Displacement
Detection of insulation faults by measuring residual
voltage
b ANSI 59N: in isolated neutral systems
b ANSI 59N/64G1: in stator windings of generators
with grounded neutral. Protects the 85 % to 90 % of
the winding, terminal end, not protected by the ANSI
27TN/64G2 function, third harmonic undervoltage
Characteristics
b definite time (DT) curve
b IDMT curve
ANSI 47 - Negative Sequence Overvoltage
Protection against phase unbalance resulting from
phase inversion, unbalanced supply or distant fault,
detected by the measurement of negative sequence
voltage. b 2 adjustable independent set points for each
RTD (alarm and trip).
93
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Customized Trip Curve
PE50551
3
Protection
Trip Curves
Defined point by point using the SFT2841 setting and operating software tool, this
curve can be used to solve all special cases involving protection coordination or
revamping.
IDMT Trip Curves
Current IDM T Trip Curves
Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications:
b IEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT)
b IEEE curves (MI, VI, EI)
b usual curves (UIT, RI, IAC).
Customized trip curve set using SFT2841 software.
IEC Curves
Equation
T
t d( I) = ----------k
----------- × --α
⎛ --I--- ⎞ – 1 β
⎝ Is ⎠
Curve Type
Coefficient Values
k
a
b
Standard inverse / A
0.14
0.02
2.97
Very inverse / B
13.5
1
1.50
Long time inverse / B
120
1
13.33
Extremely inverse / C
80
2
0.808
Ultra inverse
315.2
2.5
1
RI curve
Equation:
1
T
td ( I ) = -------------------------------------------------------- × ------------------–1 3 ,1706
I
⎛
⎞
0 ,339 – 0,236 ----⎝ Is ⎠
IEEE Curves
Equation
⎛
⎞
⎜
⎟ T
A
td ( I ) = ⎜------------------------ + B ⎟ × --⎜⎛ I ⎞p
⎟ β
1
-–
⎝⎝ Is ⎠
⎠
Curve Type
Coefficient Values
A
B
p
b
Moderately inverse
0.010
0.023
0.02
0.241
Very inverse
3.922
0.098
2
0.138
Extremely inverse
5.64
0.0243
2
0.081
IEEE Curves
Equation
⎛
⎞
⎜
⎟ T
B
D
E
td ( I ) = ⎜A + -------------------- + ----------------------- + -----------------------⎟ x ----2
3
⎜
⎛---I- – C ⎞ ⎛---I-- – C⎞
⎛---I-- – C ⎞ ⎟ β
⎝
⎝Is
⎠ ⎝Is
⎠
⎝Is
⎠⎠
94
Curve Type
Inverse
Coefficient Values
A
B
C
D
E
b
0.208
0.863
0.800
-0.418
0.195
0.297
Very inverse
0.090
0.795
0.100
-1.288
7.958
0.165
Extremely inverse
0.004
0.638
0.620
1.787
0.246
0.092
Protection
Trip Curves
Functions
Sepam Series 80
DB52590
Equation for EPATRB, EPATRC
3
EPATRB
For 0,6 A ≤ Ir ≤ 6,4 A
101.21
85
, --386
td ( I0 ) = ------------- x --T
-----I0 0, 975 0, 8
For 6,4 A ≤ Ir ≤ 200,0 A
140
td ( I0 ) = ----------,---213
--------- x --T
-----0, 8
I0 0, 975
T = 2.10
For Ir > 200,0 A
td (Ir) = T
0.6
Ir0
DB52591
EPATR-C Standard curve (logarithmic scale).
Ir (A)
EPATRC
For 0,6 A ≤ Ir ≤ 200,0 A
td ( I0 ) = 72 × I0 – 2 /3 x ---T
-------2 ,10
For Ir > 200,0 A
td (Ir) = T
EPATR-B Standard curve (logarithmic scale).
Voltage IDMT Trip Curves
Equation for ANSI 27 - Undervoltage
td ( I ) = ------------T----------V
1 – ⎛------- ⎞
⎝Vs ⎠
Equation for ANSI 59N - Neutral Voltage Displacement
td ( I ) = ------------T----------⎛ --V
----- ⎞ 1
⎝ Vs ⎠ –
Voltage/Frequency Ratio IDMT Trip Curves
Equation for ANSI 27 - Undervoltage
Curve Type
P
With G = VLn/f or VLL/f
A
1
td ( G ) = --------------------------- x T
p
⎛ ---G
----- – 1 ⎞
⎝ Gs
⎠
B
0.5
1
2
C
95
Functions
Sepam Series 80
DE50275
Setting IDMT Trip Curves, Time Delay, or TMS
Factor
The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves)
may be set as follows:
b time T, operating time at 10 x Is
b TMS factor, factor shown as T/b in the equations on the left
Timer Hold
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for:
b detection of restriking faults (DT curve)
b coordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve).
Timer hold may be blocked, if necessary.
Two Groups of Settings
Line-to-line and Line-to-Ground Short-Circuit Protection
Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.
Each unit has two groups of settings, A and B, to adapt the settings to suit the network
configuration. The active group of settings (A or B) is set by a logic input or the
communication link.
Example: normal / backup mode network
b group A for network protection in normal mode, when the network is supplied by the
utility
b group B for network protection in backup mode, when the network is supplied by a
backup generator
Thermal Overload for Machines
Each unit has two groups of settings to protect equipment that has two operating
modes.
DE51775
3
Protection
Main Characteristics
Examples:
b transformers: switching of groups of settings by logic input, according to transformer
ventilation operating mode, natural or forced ventilation (ONAN or ONAF)
b motors: switching of groups of settings according to current set point, to take into
account the thermal withstand of motors with locked rotors
NO
IrΣ
Ir
Δ
Y
Y
I’r
I’rΣ
NO
Measurement origin: example.
Measurement Origin
The measurement origin needs to be indicated for each unit of the protection functions
that may use measurements of different origins. The setting links a measurement to
a protection unit and allows the protection units to be distributed optimally among the
measurements available according to the sensors connected to the analog inputs.
Example: distributing ANSI 50N/51N function units for transformer ground fault
protection:
b two units linked to measured Ir for transformer primary protection
b two units linked to measured I'r for transformer secondary protection
b two units linked to IrΣ for protection upstream of the transformer
b two units linked to I'rΣ for protection downstream of the transformer
Summary Table
Characteristics
2 groups of settings A or B
2 groups of settings, operating modes 1 and 2
IEC IDMT curves
IEEE IDMT curves
Usual IDMT curves
EPATR curves
Voltage IDMT curves
Customized curve
Timer hold
96
Protection Functions
50/51, 50N/51N, 67, 67N/67NC
49RMS Machine
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2, 46
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
50N/51N
27, 59N, 24
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67, 67N/67NC type 2
50/51, 50N/51N, 50V/51V, 67,
67N/67NC type 2
Protection
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Functions
Setting Ranges
Settings
Time Delays
ANSI 12 - Overspeed
100 to 160 % of ωn
1 to 300 s
10 to 100 % of ωn
1 to 300 s
3
ANSI 14 - Underspeed
ANSI 21B - Underimpedance
Impedance Zs
0.05 to 2.00 VLn/IB
ANSI 24 - Overexcitation (V/Hz)
Tripping curve
Gs set point
Definite time
IDMT type A, B or C
1.03 to 2 pu
Definite time
IDMT
0.1 to 20000 s
0.1 to 1250 s
ANSI 25 - Synchro-Check
Measured voltages
Rated Primary Line-to-line Voltage
VLLp sync1 (VLnp sync1 = VLLp sync1/3)
Line-to-line
Line-to-neutral
220 V to 250 kV
220 V to 250 kV
VLLp sync2 (VLnp sync2 = VLLp sync2/3)
Rated Secondary Line-to-line Voltage
VLns sync1
VLns sync2
Synchro-Check Setpoints
dUs set point
dfs set point
dPhi set point
VLLs high set point
VLLs low set point
Other Settings
Lead time
Operating modes: no-voltage conditions
for which a tie breaker is allowed
220 V to 250 kV
220 V to 250 kV
90 V to 120 V
90 V to 120 V
90 V to 230 V
90 V to 230 V
3 % to 30 % of VLLp sync1
0.05 to 0.5 Hz
5 to 80°
70 % to 110 % VLLp sync1
10 % to 70 % VLLp sync1
3 % to 30 % of VLnp sync1
0,05 to 0,5 Hz
5 to 80°
70 % to 110 % VLnp sync1
10 % to 70 % VLnp sync1
0 to 0.5 s
Dead1 AND Live2
Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2
0 to 0.5 s
Dead1 AND Live2
Live1 AND Dead2
Dead1 XOR Dead2
Dead1 OR Dead2
Dead1 AND Dead2
ANSI 27 - Undervoltage (LL) or (Ln)
Trip curve
Set point
Measurement origin
Definite time
IDMT
5 to 100 % of VLLp
Main channels (VLL) or additional channels (VLL’)
0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 27D - Positive Sequence Undervoltage
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
15 to 60 % of VLLp
Main channels (VLL) or additional channels (VLL’)
0.05 to 300 s
5 to 100 % of VLLp
Main channels (VLL) or additional channels (VLL’)
0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remnant Undervoltage
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
ANSI 27TN/64G2 - Third Harmonic Undervoltage
Vs set point (fixed)
K set point (adaptive)
Positive sequence undervoltage
Minimum apparent power
0.2 to 20 % of VLnp
0.1 to 0.2
50 to 100 % of VLLp
1 to 90 % of Sb (Sb = 3.VLL • IB)
0.05 to 300 s
0.05 to 300 s
1 to 120 % of Sn (1)
0.1 s to 300 s
5 to 120 % of Sn (1)
0.1 s to 300 s
0.05 to 1 IB
0.05 to 300 s
5 to 100 % of Sn (1)
0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 32P - Directional Active Overpower
ANSI 32Q - Directional Reactive Overpower
ANSI 37 - Phase Undercurrent
ANSI 37P - Directional Active Underpower
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature Monitoring
Alarm set point TS1
Trip set point TS2
32 °F to 356 °F or 0 °C to 180 °C
32 °F to 356 °F or 0 °C to 180 °C
ANSI 40 - Field Loss (underimpedance)
Common point: Xa
Circle 1: Xb
Circle 2: Xc
0.02 VLn/IB to 0.2 VLn/IB + 187.5 kW
0.2 VLn/IB to 1.4 VLn/IB + 187.5 kW
0.6 VLn/IB to 3 VLn/IB + 187.5 kW
0.05 to 300 s
0.1 s to 300 s
(1) Sn = 3.IN.VLLp.
97
Functions
Sepam Series 80
3
Protection
Setting Ranges
Functions
Settings
Time Delays
ANSI 46 - Negative Sequence/Unbalance
Tripping curve
Is set point
Measurement origin
Definite time
Schneider Electric
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
RI² (setting constant from 1 to 100)
Definite time
0.1 to 5 IB
IDMT
0.1 to 5 IB (Schneider Electric)
0.1 to 1 IB (IEC, IEEE)
0.03 to 0.2 IB (RI²)
Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 1s
ANSI 47 - Negative Sequence Overvoltage
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
1 to 50 % of VLLp
Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 48/51LR -Locked Rotor/Excessive Starting Time
Is set point
0.5 IB to 5 IB
ST starting time
LT and LTS time delays
0.5 to 300 s
0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal Overload for Cables
Admissible current
Time constant T1
1 to 1.73 IB
1 to 600 min
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal Overload for Capacitors
Alarm current
Trip current
Positioning of the hot tripping curve
Current setting
Time setting
1.05 to 1.70 IB
1.05 to 1.70 IB
1.02 x trip current to 2 IB
1 to 2000 minutes (variable range depending on the trip current and current
setting)
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal Overload for Machines
Accounting for negative sequence component
Time constant
Heating
Cooling
Alarm and tripping set points (Es1 and Es2)
Initial thermal capacity used (Es0)
Switching of thermal settings condition
Maximum equipment temperature
Measurement origin
Mode 1
Mode 2
T1: 1 to 600 min
T2: 5 to 600 min
T1: 1 to 600 min
T2: 5 to 600 min
0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
0 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
0 to 100 %
by logic input
by Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 IB
140 °F to 392 °F (60 to 200 °C)
Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
ANSI 50BF - Breaker Failure
Presence of current
Operating time
0.2 to 2 IN
0.05 s to 3 s
ANSI 50/27 - Inadvertent Energization
Is set point
Vs set point
0.05 to 4 IN
10 to 100 % VLLp
T1: 0 to 10 s
T2: 0 to 10 s
ANSI 50/51 - Phase Overcurrent
Trip curve
Is set point
Timer hold
Measurement origin
Confirmation
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
98
Tripping Time Delay
Timer Hold
Definite time
DT
DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
DT or IDMT
IA : I, VI, EI
DT or IDMT
Customized
DT
Definite time
0.05 to 24 IN
IDMT
0.05 to 2.4 IN
Definite time (DT; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
None
By negative sequence overvoltage
By line-to-line undervoltage
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Functions
Protection
Setting Ranges
Settings
Time Delays
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Ground Fault
Trip curve
Isr set point
Timer hold
Measurement origin
Tripping Time Delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
EPATR-B, EPATR-C
Customized
0.6 to 5 A
0.6 to 5 A
0.01 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 to 1 INr (min. 0.1 A)
Definite time (DT; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
Timer Hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT
DT
EPATR-B
EPATR-C
Definite time
IDMT
3
0.5 to 1 s
0.1 to 3 s
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
Ir input, I’r input, sum of phase currents IrΣ or sum of phase currents I’rΣ
ANSI 50V/51V - Voltage-Restrained Overcurrent
Tripping curve
Is set point
Timer hold
Measurement origin
Tripping Time Delay
Timer Hold
Definite time
DT
DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
DT
IEC : SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
DT or IDMT
IEEE : MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
DT or IDMT
IAC : I, VI, EI
DT or IDMT
Customized
DT
Definite time
0.5 to 24 IN
IDMT
0.5 to 2.4 IN
Definite time (DT; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
Main channels (I) or additional channels (I’)
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Isr
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 51C - Capacitor Bank Unbalance
Is set point
0.05 A to 2 I’N
Definite time
0.1 to 300 s
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage (LL) or (LN)
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
50 to 150 % of VLLp or VLnp
Main channels (VLL) or additional channels (VLL’)
0.05 to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral Voltage Displacement
Tripping curve
Set point
Measurement origin
Definite time
IDMT
Definite time
2 to 80 % of VLLp
IDMT
2 to 10 % of VLLp
Main channels (VLL), additional channels (VLL’) or neutral-point voltage VLnt
0.05 to 300 s
0.1 to 100 s
ANSI 64REF - Restricted Ground Fault Differential
Isr set point
Measurement origin
0.05 to 0.8 IN (IN ≥ 20 A)
0.1 to 0.8 IN (IN < 20 A)
Main channels (I, Ir) or additional channels (I’, I’r)
ANSI 66 - Starts per Hour
Total number of starts
Number of consecutive starts
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
1 to 60
1 to 60
Period
T time delay stop/start
1 to 6 h
0 to 90 min
ANSI 67 - Directional Phase Overcurrent
Characteristic angle
Tripping curve
Is set point
Timer hold
30°, 45°, 60°
Tripping Time Delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
Customized
0.1 to 24 IN
0.1 to 2.4 IN
Definite time (DT; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
Timer Hold
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT
Definite time
IDMT
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Isr
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
99
Protection
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Functions
Setting Ranges
Settings
Time
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional Ground Fault, Projection (Type 1)
3
Characteristic angle
Isr set point
Vsr set point
-45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
0.01 to 15 INr (mini. 0,1 A)
2 to 80 % of VLLp
Memory time
T0mem time
Vrmem validity set point
Ir input, I’r input
Measurement origin
Definite time
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0; 0.05 s to 300 s
0; 2 to 80 % of VLLp
ANSI 67N/67NC - Directional Ground Fault, According to Ir Vector Magnitude (Type 2)
Characteristic angle
Tripping curve
Isr set point
Vsr set point
Timer hold
Measurement origin
-45°, 0°, 15°, 30°, 45°, 60°, 90°
Tripping Time Delay
Definite time
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
RI
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
IAC: I, VI, EI
Customized
0.1 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 to 1 INr (min. 0.1 A)
2 to 80 % of VLLp
Timer Hold Delay
DT
DT
DT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT or IDMT
DT
Definite time
IDMT
Definite time (DT; timer hold)
IDMT (IDMT; reset time)
Ir input, I’r input or sum of phase currents IrΣ
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Isr
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.5 s to 20 s
ANSI 67N/67NC Type 3 - Directional Ground Fault, According to Ir Vector Magnitude Directionalized on a Tripping Sector
Tripping sector start angle
Tripping sector end angle
Isr set point
CSH Zero Sequence CT (2 A rating)
1 A CT
ZSCT + ACE990 (range 1)
Vsr set point
Measurement origin
0° to 359°
0° to 359°
0.1 A to 30 A
0.005 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
0.01 to 15 INr (min. 0.1 A)
Calculated Vr (sum of 3 voltages)
2 to 80 % of VLLp
Measured Vr (external VT)
0.6 to 80 % of VLLp
Definite time
Inst; 0.05 s to 300 s
Ir input or I’r input
ANSI 78PS - Pole Slip
Time delay of the equal-area criterion
Maximum number of power swings
0.1 to 300 s
1 to 30
Time between 2 power swings
1 to 300 s
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
50 to 55 Hz or 60 to 65 Hz
Main channels (V) or additional channels (V’)
0.1 to 300 s
40 to 50 Hz or 50 to 60 Hz
Main channels (VLn) or additional channels (VLn’)
0.1 to 300 s
0.1 to 10 Hz/s
0.15 to 300 s
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Set point and time delay
Measurement origin
ANSI 81R - Rate of Change of Frequency
ANSI 87M - Machine Differential
Ids set point
0.05 to 0.5 IN (IN < 20 A)
0.1 to 0.5 IN (IN < 20 A)
ANSI 87T - Transformer Differential
High set point
Percentage-Based Curve
Ids set point
Slope Id/It
Slope I1/It2
Slope change point
Restraint on Energization
Current threshold
Delay
Restraint on CT loss
Activity
Restraint on Harmonics Percentage
Choice of restraint
High set point
Harmonic 2 percentage set point
Harmonic 2 restraint
Harmonic 5 percentage set point
Harmonic 5 restraint
100
3 to 18 IN1
30 to 100 % IN1
15 to 50 %
without, 50 to 100 %
1 to 18 IN1
1 to 10 %
0 to 300 s
On / Off
Classic
Classic
On
off, 5 to 40 %
per phase / total
off, 5 to 40 %
per phase / total
Self-Adapting
Self-adapting
On / Off
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Description
Sepam performs all the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network
operation:
b the main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
b the predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
v logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions
v creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
v creation of personalized mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
v customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages
b with the Logipam option, Sepam can provide the most varied control and monitoring
functions, programmed using the SFT2885 programming software that implements
the Logipam ladder language
Operating Principle
Processing control and monitoring functions can be broken down into three phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES120 input /
output module
v local control commands transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
v remote control commands (TC) received via the Modbus communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control a device
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link
- by real-time indications on device status on the animated mimic diagram
PE50249
Logic Inputs and Outputs
The number of Sepam inputs/outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring
functions used. The five outputs included in the Sepam Series 80 base unit may be
extended by adding one, two, or three MES120 modules with 14 logic inputs and 6
output relays.
After the number of MES120 modules required for the needs of an application is set,
the logic inputs are assigned to functions. The functions are chosen from a list which
covers the whole range of possible uses. The functions are adapted to meet needs
within the limits of the logic inputs available. The inputs may also be inverted for
undervoltage type operation.
A default input / output assignment is proposed for the most frequent uses.
Maximum Sepam Series 80 configuration with 3 MES120
modules: 42 inputs and 23 outputs.
101
3
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Each Sepam contains the appropriate predefined control and monitoring functions for
the chosen application.
3
ANSI 94/69 - Circuit Breaker/Contactor Control
This function provides control of breaking devices equipped with different types of
closing and tripping coils:
b circuit breakers with shunt or undervoltage trip coils
b latching contactors with NO contacts
b contactors with latched commands.
The function processes all interrupting device closing and tripping conditions, based
on:
b protection functions
b interrupting device status data
b remote control commands
b specific control functions for each application (e.g. recloser, synchro-check)
The function also blocks interrupting device closing according to the operating
conditions.
Automatic Transfer (AT)
This function transfers bus supply from one source to another. It concerns substations
with two mains, with or without tie breakers.
DE51889
The function carries out:
b automatic transfer with a break if there is a loss of voltage or a fault
b manual transfer and return to normal operation without a break, with or without
synchro-check
b control of the tie breaker circuit breaker (optional)
b selection of the normal operating mode
b the necessary logic to ensure that at the end of the sequence, only one circuit
breaker out of two or two out of three are closed.
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Automatic transfer with synchro-check controlled by
Sepam Series 80.
The function is distributed between the two Sepam units protecting the two mains. The
synchro-check function (ANSI 25) is carried out by the optional MCS025 module, in
conjunction with one of the two Sepam units.
Load shedding - Automatic restart
Automatic load regulation on electrical networks by load shedding followed by
automatic restarting of motors connected to the network
Load Shedding
The interrupting device opens to stop motors in case of:
b detection of a network voltage sag by the positive sequence undervoltage protection
function ANSI 27D
b receipt of a load shedding command on a logic input.
Automatic Restart
The motors disconnected as a result of the network voltage sag are automatically
restarted:
b after the return of network voltage is detected by the positive sequence undervoltage
protection function ANSI 27D
b and a time delay has run out, so as to stagger motor restarts.
De-Excitation
Interruption of a synchronous generator’s excitation supply and tripping of the
generator interrupting device in case of:
b detection of an internal generator fault
b detection of an excitation system fault
b receipt of a de-excitation command on a logic input or via the communication link.
102
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
Genset Shutdown
Shutdown of the driving machine, tripping of the interrupting device and interruption of
the generator excitation supply in case of:
b detection of an internal generator fault
b receipt of a genset shutdown command on a logic input or via the communication
link.
Control of Capacitor Banks
This function controls 1 to 4 switches for capacitor steps, taking into account all the
closing and tripping conditions determined by the ANSI 94/69 function for control of
the switchgear. Manual or automatic control, controlled by an external reactive-energy
regulator.
ANSI 68 - Zone Sequence Interlocking (ZSI)
This function provides:
b perfect tripping coordination with line-to-line and line-to-ground short-circuits, on all
types of network
b faster tripping of the breakers closest to the source (solving the drawback of
conventional time coordination).
Each Sepam is capable of:
b sending a blocking input when a fault is detected by the phase overcurrent and
ground fault protection functions, which may or may not be directional (ANSI 50/51,
50N/51N, 67 or 67N/67NC)
b and receiving blocking inputs which block protection tripping. A saving mechanism
ensures continued operation of the protection in the event of a blocking link
malfunction.
ANSI 86 - Latching/Acknowledgement
The tripping outputs for all the protection functions and all the logic inputs can be
latched individually. The latched information is saved in the event of an auxiliary power
outage. (The logic outputs cannot be latched.)
All the latched data may be acknowledged:
b locally, with the key reset
b remotely via a logic input
b or via the communication link
The Latching/acknowledgement function, when combined with the circuit breaker/
contactor control function, can be used to create the ANSI 86 "Lockout relay" function.
Output Relay Testing
Each output relay is activated for 5 seconds, to make it simpler to check output
connections and connected switchgear operation.
103
3
Functions
Sepam Series 80
PE50287
ANSI 30 - Local Annunciation
LED Indication
b 2 LEDs, on the front and back of Sepam, indicate the unit operating status, and are
visible when a Sepam without a UMI is mounted inside the LV compartment, with
access to connectors:
v green LED ON: Sepam on
v red "key" LED: Sepam unavailable (initialization phase or detection of an internal
failure)
b 9 yellow LEDs on the Sepam front panel:
v pre-assigned and identified by standard removable labels
v the SFT2841 software tool may be used to assign LEDs and personalize labels.
Local indications on the Sepam front panel.
PE50274
3
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
Local Annunciation on Sepam Display
Events and alarms may be indicated locally on Sepam’s advanced UMI or on the
mimic-based UMI by:
b messages on the display unit, available in 2 languages:
v English, factory-set messages, not modifiable
v local language, according to the version delivered (the language version is chosen
when Sepam is set up)
b one of the 9 yellow LEDs lights up, according to the LED assignment, which is set
using SFT2841
Alarm Processing
When an alarm appears, the related message replaces the current display and the
related LED goes on.
The number and type of messages depend on the type of Sepam. The messages are
linked to Sepam functions and may be viewed on the front-panel display and in the
SFT2841 "Alarms" screen.
b to clear the message from the display, press the key
b after the fault has disappeared, press the key: the light goes off and Sepam is reset
SFT2841: alarm history.
104
b the list of alarm messages remains accessible (
pressing the clear key
key) and may be cleared by
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Description of Predefined Functions
PE50486
Local Control Using the Mimic-Based UMI
Sepam Control Mode
A key-switch on the mimic-based UMI is used to select the Sepam control mode. Three
modes are available : Remote, Local or Test.
In Remote mode:
b remote control commands are taken into account
b local control commands are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker open
command.
In Local mode:
b remote control commands are disabled, with the exception of the circuit-breaker
open command
b local control commands are enabled.
Test mode should be selected for tests on equipment, e.g. during preventivemaintenance operations:
b all functions enabled in Local mode are available in Test mode
b no remote indications (TS) are sent via the communication link.
Local control using the mimic-based UMI.
The Logipam programming software can be used to customize control-mode
processing.
View Device Status on the Animated Mimic Diagram
For local control of devices, all information required by operators can be displayed
simultaneously on the mimic-based UMI:
b single-line diagram of the equipment controlled by Sepam, with an animated, graphic
indication of device status in real time
b the desired current, voltage and power measurements.
The local-control mimic diagram can be customized by adapting one of the supplied,
predefined diagrams or by creating a diagram from scratch.
Local control of devices
All the devices for which opening and closing are controlled by Sepam can be
controlled locally using the mimic-based UMI. The most common interlock conditions
can be defined be logic equations or by Logipam.
The sure and simple operating procedure is the following:
b select the device to be controlled by moving the selection window using the keys
or
. Sepam checks whether local control of the selected device is authorized and
informs the operator (selection window with a solid line)
b selection confirmation for the device to be controlled by pressing the key
(the
selection window flashes)
b device control by pressing:
: open command
v key
: close command.
v or key
105
3
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Adaptation of Predefined Functions
Using the SFT2841 Software
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
using the SFT2841 software, which offers the following customization options:
b logic equation editor, to adapt and complete the predefined control and monitoring
functions
b creation of personalized messages for local annunciation
b creation of custom mimic diagrams corresponding to the controlled devices
b customization of the control matrix by changing the assignment of output relays,
LEDs and annunciation messages
3
DE51890
Operating Principle
PE50277
Logic Equation Editor
The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to:
b complete protection function processing:
v additional interlocking
v conditional blocking/validation of functions
b adapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control
sequences
Note that the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the
Logipam programming software.
SFT2841: logic equation editor.
A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from:
b protection functions
b logic inputs
b local control commands transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
b remote control commands
using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT, and automation functions such as
time delays, bistables and time programmer.
Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically.
The result of an equation may then be:
b assigned to a logic output, LED or message via the control matrix
b transmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication
b utilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or block
interrupting device closing
b used to block or reset a protection function
106
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Adaptation of Predefined Functions
Using the SFT2841 Software
Personalized Alarm and Operating Messages
The alarm and operating messages may be personalized using the SFT2841 software
tool. The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be
assigned via the control matrix for display:
b on the Sepam display
b in the SFT2841 "Alarms" and "Alarm History" screens.
PE50492
Local-Control Mimic Diagram
Main #2
52
Ia = 175 A
Vab = 6.61 kV
P = 1.81 MW
Q = 860 kvar
The mimic-diagram editor in the SFT2841 software can be used to create a singleline diagram corresponding exactly to the equipment controlled by Sepam. Two
procedures are available:
b rework a diagram taken from the library of standard diagrams in the SFT2841
software
b creation of an original diagram : graphic creation of the single-line diagram,
positioning of symbols for the animated devices, insertion of measurements, text,
etc.
Creation of a customized mimic diagram is made easy:
b library of predefined symbols: circuit breakers, grounding switch, etc.
b creation of personalized symbols.
SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.
PE50490
Control Matrix
The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from:
b protection functions
b control and monitoring functions
b logic inputs
b logic equations or Logipam program
to the following output data:
b output relays
b 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b messages for local annunciation
b triggering of disturbance recording.
SFT2841: control matrix.
107
3
Functions
Sepam Series 80
Control and Monitoring
Customized Functions Using
Logipam
The SFT2885 programming software (Logipam) can be used to enhance Sepam by
programming specific control and monitoring functions.
3
Only the Sepam Series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080
option can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by Logipam.
DE51891
Operating Principle
PE50257
Logipam Programming Software
The Logipam SFT2885 programming software can be used to:
b adapt predefined control and monitoring functions
b program specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined
versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required
by the application
It is made up of:
b a ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program
complex control functions
b a simulator for complete program debugging
b a code generator to run the program on Sepam
The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete
file can be printed.
SFT2885: Logipam programming software.
Offering more possibilities than the logic-equation editor, Logipam can be used to
create the following functions :
b specific automatic transfer functions
b motor starting sequences.
It is not possible to combine the functions programmed by Logipam with functions
adapted by the logic-equation editor in a given Sepam.
The Logipam program uses the input data from:
b protection functions
b logic inputs
b remote control commands
b local control commands transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
The result of Logipam processing may then be:
b assigned to a logic output, directly or via the control matrix
b assigned to a LED or message via the control matrix
b transmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication
b used by the predefined control and monitoring functions
b used to block or reset a protection function
108
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Base units are defined according to the
following characteristics:
b type of User-Machine Interface (UMI)
b working language
b type of base unit connector
b type of current sensor connector
b type of voltage sensor connector
Base Unit
Presentation
User-Machine Interface
Two types of User-Machine Interfaces (UMI) are available for Sepam Series 80 base
units:
b mimic-based UMI
b advanced UMI
The advanced UMI can be integrated in the base unit or installed remotely on the
enclosure. Integrated and remote advanced UMIs offer the same functions.
A Sepam Series 80 with a remote advanced UMI is made up of:
b a base unit without any UMI, for mounting inside the LV compartment
b a remote advanced UMI (DSM303)
v for flush mounting on the front panel of the cubicle in the location most suitable for
the facility manager
v for connection to the Sepam base unit using a prefabricated CCA77x cable
The characteristics of the remote advanced UMI module (DSM303) are presented on
page 152.
PE50472
Comprehensive Data for Facility Managers
All the data required for local equipment operation may be displayed on demand:
b display of all measurement and diagnosis data in numerical format with units and/or
in bar graphs
b display of operating and alarm messages, with alarm acknowledgment and Sepam
resetting
b display of the list of activated protection functions and the main settings of major
protection functions
b adaptation of activated protection function set points or time delays in response to
new operating constraints
b display of Sepam and remote module versions
b output testing and logic input status display
b display of Logipam data: status of variables, timers
b entry of two passwords to protect parameter and protection settings
Sepam Series 80 base unit with integrated advanced UMI.
Local Control of Devices Using the Mimic-Based UMI
PE50473
The mimic-based UMI provides the same functions as the advanced UMI as well as
local control of devices:
b selection of the Sepam control mode
b view device status on the animated mimic diagram
b local opening and closing of all the devices controlled by Sepam
Ergonomic Data Presentation
b
b
b
b
keypad keys identified by pictograms for intuitive navigation
menu-guided access to data
graphical LCD screen to display any character or symbol
excellent display quality under all lighting conditions, such as automatic contrast
setting and backlit screen (user activated)
Working Language
PE50127
Sepam Series 80 base unit with mimic-based UMI.
All the texts and messages displayed on the advanced UMI or on the mimic-based UMI
are available in two languages:
b English, the default working language
b and a second language, which may be
v French
v Spanish
v U.S. English (ANSI)
v another "local" language
Please contact a representative about local language customization.
Connecting Sepam to the Parameter Setting Tool
The SFT2841 parameter setting tool is required for Sepam protection and parameter
setting. A PC containing the SFT2841 software is connected to the RS232
communication port on the front of the unit.
Customized advanced UMI.
109
3
Base Unit
Presentation
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Selection Guide
With Integrated
Advanced UMI
With Mimic-Based
UMI
PE50475
With Remote
Advanced UMI
PE50262
Base Unit
PE50260
3
Functions
Local Indication
Metering and diagnosis data
b
b
b
Alarms and operating messages
b
b
b
List of activated protection functions
b
b
b
Main protection settings
b
b
b
Version of Sepam and remote
modules
b
b
b
Status of logic inputs
b
b
b
Logipam data
b
b
b
Switchgear status on the animated
mimic diagram
b
Phasor diagram of currents or
voltages
b
Local Control
Alarm acknowledgement
b
b
b
Sepam reset
b
b
b
Output testing
b
b
b
Selection of Sepam control mode
b
Device open/close command
b
Characteristics
Screen
Size
128 x 64 pixels
128 x 64 pixels
128 x 240 pixels
Automatic contrast setting
b
b
b
Backlit screen
b
b
b
9
9
14
Keypad
Number of keys
Control-mode switch
Remote / Local / Test
LEDs
Sepam operating status
b base unit: 2 LEDs visible on back
b remote advanced UMI: 2 LEDs
visible on front
2 LEDs, visible from front and back
2 LEDs, visible from front and back
Indication LEDs
9 LEDs on remote advanced UMI
9 LEDs on front
9 LEDs on front
b bare base unit, mounted at the
back of the compartment using
the AMT880 mounting plate
b DSM303 remote advanced UMI
module , flush mounted on the
front of the cubicle and connected
to the base unit with the CCA77x
prefabricated cable
Flush mounted on front of cubicle
Flush mounted on front of cubicle
Mounting
110
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Presentation
PE50663
Hardware Characteristics
Removable Memory Cartridge
Sepam Series 80 memory cartridge and backup battery.
The cartridge contains all the Sepam characteristics:
b all Sepam protection and parameter settings
b all the metering and protection functions required for the application
b predefined control functions
b functions customized by control matrix or logic equations
b functions programmed by Logipam (optional)
b personalized local-control mimic diagram
b accumulated energies and switchgear diagnosis values
b working languages, customized and otherwise
It may be made tamper-proof by lead sealing. It is removable and easy to access on
the front panel of Sepam to reduce maintenance time. If a base unit malfunctions,
simply:
b switch off Sepam and unplug connectors
b retrieve original cartridge
b replace the faulty base unit by a spare base unit (without cartridge)
b load the original cartridge into the new base unit
b plug in the connectors and switch Sepam on again
Sepam is operational, with all its standard and customized functions, without requiring
any reloading of protection and parameter settings.
Backup Battery
Standard lithium battery, 1/2 AA format, 3.6 Volts. It allows the following data to be
stored in the event of an auxiliary power outage:
b time-stamped event tables
b disturbance recording data
b maximum demands, tripping context, etc
b date and time
The battery presence and charge are monitored by Sepam. The main data (protection
and parameter settings) are saved in the event of an auxiliary power outage,
regardless of the state of the battery.
Auxiliary Power Supply
DC power supply voltage from 24 to 250 V DC.
Five Relay Outputs
The five relay outputs O1 to O5 on the base unit must be connected to connector
A . Each output can be assigned to a predetermined function using the SFT2841
software. O1 to O4 are 4 control outputs with one NO contact, used by default for the
switchgear control function:
b O1: switchgear tripping
b O2: switchgear closing blocking
b O3: switchgear closing
b O4: available
O5 is an indication output used by default for the watchdog function and has two
contacts, one NC and one NO.
111
3
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Main Connector, Voltage, and Residual Current Input
Connectors
PE50666
3
Base Unit
Presentation
A choice of two types of removable, screw-lockable 20-pin connectors:
b CCA620 screw-type connectors
b or CCA622 ring lug connectors
The presence of the connector is monitored.
Connector for Additional Voltage Inputs (Sepam B83)
CCT640 connector, removable and screw-lockable. The presence of the CCT640
connector is monitored.
Phase Current Input Connectors
Current sensors connected to removable, screw-lockable connectors according to
type of sensors used:
b CCA630 or CCA634 connector for 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b or CCA671 connector for LPCT sensors
The presence of these connectors is monitored.
Mounting Accessories
Spring Clips
8 spring clips are supplied with the base unit to flush-mount Sepam in mounting plates
0.059 to 0.236 in (1.5 to 6 mm) thick. Simple, tool-free installation.
AMT880 Mounting Plate
It is used to mount a Sepam without UMI inside the compartment with access to
connectors on the rear panel. Mounting used with remote advanced UMI module
(DSM303).
AMT820 Blanking Plate
It fills in the space left when a standard model Sepam 2000 is replaced by a
Sepam Series 80.
Spare Base Units
The following spares are available to replace faulty base units:
b base units with or without UMI, without cartridge or connectors
b all types of standard cartridges, with or without the Logipam option.
AMT852 Lead Sealing Accessory
The AMT852 lead sealing accessory can be used to prevent unauthorized modification
of the settings of Sepam Series 80 units with integrated advanced UMIs. The
accessory includes:
b a lead-sealable cover plate
b the screws required to secure the cover plate to the integrated advanced UMI
of the Sepam unit.
Note: The AMT852 lead sealing accessory can secured only to the integrated advanced UMIs of
Sepam Series 80 units Contact us to determine the serial number of the device on which you can fit
the lead sealing accessory.
112
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Description
Front Panel with Advanced UMI
Green LED: Sepam on.
Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
9 yellow indication LEDs.
Label identifying the indication LEDs.
5
6
7
Graphical LCD screen.
Display of measurements.
Display of switchgear, network and machine
diagnosis data.
Display of alarm messages.
Sepam reset (or confirm data entry).
Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms (or
move cursor up).
LED test (or move cursor down).
Display and adaptation of activated protection
settings.
Display of Sepam and Logipam data.
Entry of 2 passwords.
RS232 PC connection port.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3
DE52687
1
2
3
4
16 Backup battery.
17 Memory cartridge.
18 Door.
Graphical LCD screen.
Green LED: Sepam on.
Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
Local close command.
Local open command.
Label identifying the indication LEDs.
9 yellow indication LEDs.
Move cursor up.
Confirm data entry.
Move cursor down.
RS232 PC connection port.
Transparent door.
13
14
15
16
17
18
Entry of 2 passwords.
Mimic-based UMI display.
Sepam reset.
Display of alarm messages.
Acknowledgement and clearing of alarms.
Display of switchgear and network diagnosis
data (or LED test).
Display and adaptation of activated protection
settings.
Display of measurements.
Display of Sepam and Logipam data.
Three-position key switch to select Sepam
control mode.
19
20
21
22
Front Panel with Mimic-Based UMI
DE52688
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
52
Ia = 175 A
Vab = 6.61 kV
P = 1.81 MW
Q = 860 kvar
23 Backup battery.
24 Memory cartridge.
25 Door.
113
3
1
2
3
4
5
Base unit.
8 fixing points for 4 spring clips.
Red LED: Sepam unavailable.
Green LED: Sepam on.
Gasket.
A 20-pin connector for:
b 24 V DC to 250 V DC auxiliary supply
b 5 relay outputs.
B1 Connector for 3 phase current Ia, Ib, Ic inputs.
B2 Sepam T87, M87, M88, G87, G88:
b connector for 3-phase current I'a, I'b, I'c
inputs
Sepam B83:
b connector for
v 3 phase voltage V'an, V'bn, V'cn inputs
v 1 residual voltage V’r input.
Sepam C86:
b connector for capacitor unbalance current
inputs.
C1 Modbus communication port 1.
C2 Modbus communication port 2.
D1 Remote module connection port 1.
D2 Remote module connection port 2.
E 20-pin connector for:
b phase voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn inputs
b 1 residual voltage Vr input.
b 2 residual current Ir, I'r inputs.
F Spare port.
H1 Connector for 1st MES120 input/output module.
H2 Connector for 2nd MES120 input/output module.
H3 Connector for 3rd MES120 input/output module.
Functional ground.
114
Base Unit
Description
Rear Panel
DE51781
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Technical Characteristics
Weight
Minimum weight (base unit without MES120)
Maximum weight (base unit with 3 MES120)
Base Unit with Advanced UMI
Base Unit with Mimic-Based UMI
5.29 lb (2.4 kg)
8.82 lb (4.0 kg)
6.61 lb (3.0 kg)
10.1 lb (4.6 kg)
3
Sensor Inputs
Phase Current Inputs
1 A or 5 A CT
Input impedance
Consumption
< 0.02 W
< 0.02 VA (1 A CT)
< 0.5 VA (5 A CT)
4 In
100 In
Continuous thermal withstand
1 second overload
Voltage Inputs
Input impedance
Consumption
Continuous thermal withstand
1-second overload
Isolation of inputs in relation to
other isolated groups
Phase
Residual
> 100 k W
< 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
240 V
480 V
Enhanced
> 100 k W
< 0.015 VA (100 V VT)
240 V
480 V
Enhanced
Relay Outputs
Control Relay Outputs O1 to O4 and O x 01 (1)
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Resistive load
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load L/R < 40 ms
Resistive load
Load pf > 0.3
Making capacity
Isolation of outputs in relation to
other isolated groups
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
8A
8A/ 4A
6A/ 2A
4A/ 1A
8A
0.7 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
8A
0.3 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
100 to 240 V AC
8A
8A
5A
< 15 A for 200 ms
Enhanced
Annunciation Relay Output O5
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
Isolation of outputs in relation to
other isolated groups
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load pf > 0.3
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
2A
2A/ 1A
2A
0.5 A
2A
0.15 A
100 to 240 V AC
2A
1A
Enhanced
Power Supply
Voltage
Maximum consumption
Inrush current
Acceptable ripple content
Acceptable momentary outages
24 to 250 V DC
< 16 W
< 10 A 10 ms
12 %
100 ms
-20 % / +10 %
Battery
Format
Service life
1/2 AA lithium 3.6 V
10 years Sepam energized
8 years Sepam not energized
(1) Relay outputs complying with clause 6.7 of standard C 97.90 (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations)
115
Characteristics
Sepam Series 80
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Base Unit
Environmental Characteristics
Standard
Level/Class
Value
Emission Tests
3
Disturbing field emission
Conducted disturbance emission
IEC 60255-25
EN 55022
IEC 60255-25
EN 55022
A
A
Immunity Tests – Radiated Disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency
ANSI C37.90.2
IEC 60255-22-3
IEC 61000-4-3
ANSI C37.90.3
IEC 60225-22-2
IEC 61000-4-8
III
4
Immunity Tests – Conducted Disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances
Fast transient bursts
35 V/m; 25 MHz - 1GHz
10 V/m; 80 MHz - 1 GHz
10 V/m; 80 MHz - 2 GHz
8 kV air; 4 kV contact
8 kV air; 6 kV contact
30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (1-3 s) (4)
IEC 60255-22-6
ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-22-4
IEC 61000-4-4
ANSI C37.90.1
IEC 60255-22-1
IEC 61000-4-12
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60255-11
III
Standard
Level/Class
Value
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60068-2-6
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-21-3
2
Fc
2
2
1 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
2 Hz - 13.2 Hz; a = ±1 mm
10 Gn / 11 ms
2 Gn (horizontal axes)
1 Gn (vertical axes)
IEC 60255-21-1
IEC 60255-21-2
IEC 60255-21-2
2
2
2
2 Gn; 10 Hz - 150 Hz
27 Gn / 11 ms
20 Gn / 16 ms
Standard
Level/Class
Value
Exposure to cold
Exposure to dry heat
Continuous exposure to damp heat
Salt mist
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 2
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60068-2-52
IEC 60068-2-60
Ad
Bd
Cab
Kb/2
Influence of corrosion/Gas test 4
IEC 60068-2-60
-25 °C
+70 °C
10 days; 93 % RH ; 40 °C
6 days
21 days; 75 % RH; 25 °C;
0.5 ppm H2S; 1 ppm SO2
21 days; 75 % HR; 25 °C;
0.01 ppm H2S; 0.2 ppm SO2;
0.2 ppm NO2; 0.01 ppm Cl2
IEC 60068-2-14
IEC 60068-2-1
IEC 60068-2-2
IEC 60068-2-78
IEC 60068-2-30
Nb
Ab
Bb
Cab
Db
-25 °C at +70 °C; 5 °C/min
-25 °C
+70 °C
56 days; 93 % RH; 40 °C
6 days; 95 % RH; 55 °C
Standard
Level/Class
Value
IEC 60529
NEMA
IEC 60695-2-11
IP52
Type 12
Other panels IP20
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
100 MHz damped oscillating wave
Surges
Voltage interruptions
Mechanical Robustness
In Operation
Vibrations
Shocks
Earthquakes
A and B
IV
III
10 V
4 kV; 2.5 kHz
4 kV; 2.5 kHz/2 kV, 5 kHz
4 Kv; 2.5 KHz
2.5 kV CM; 2.5 kV DM
2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
2.5 kV CM; 1 kV DM
2 kV CM; 1 kV DM
100 % during 100 ms
De-Energized
Vibrations
Shocks
Jolts
Climatic Withstand
In Operation
In Storage (3)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate
Exposure to cold
Exposure to dry heat
Continuous exposure to damp heat
Safety
Enclosure Safety Tests
Front panel tightness
Fire Resistance
650 °C with glow wire
Electrical Safety Tests
1.2/50 μs pulse wave
Power frequency dielectric withstand
Certification
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90
IEC 60255-5
European directives:
b 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
92/31/EEC Amendment
93/68/EEC Amendment
b 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
93/68/EEC Amendment
UL
UL508 - CSA C22.2 n° 14-95
File E212533
CSA
CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 / n° 94-M91 / n° 0.17-00
File 210625
(1) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode.
(2) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.
(3) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.
(4) Iso > 0.1 INr for the 50N/51N and 67N protection functions, with Ir calculated as the sum of the phase currents.
e
116
EN 50263 harmonized
standard
5 kV (1)
1 kV 1 mn (indication output)
1.5 kV 1 mn (control output)
2 kV 1 mn(2)
Base Unit
Dimensions
Dimensions
in.
(mm)
DE52760
DE80070
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
3
in.
(mm)
1.57
(40)
8.74
(222)
9.49 7.87
(241) (200)
10.39
(264)
Front view of Sepam
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
7.28
(185)
Side view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 0.05 in to 0.23 in (1.5 mm to 6 mm) thick
in.
(mm)
DE52762
DE52761
Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.
9.80
(249)
in.
(mm)
7.95
(202)
7.28
(185)
4.41
(112)
2.53
(64.2)
9.84
(250)
1.00
(25.5)
10.39
(264)
Cut-out.
Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Front panel: 0.05 in to 0.23 in (1.5 mm to 6 mm) thick
Assembly with AMT880 Mounting Plate
DE80075
DE52763
0.26
(6.5)
in.
(mm)
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
7.95
(202)
9.84
(250)
11.97
(304)
12.76
(324)
9.69
(246)
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
in.
(mm)
8.43
(214)
5.55
(141)
1.57
(40)
0.39
(10)
0.91
(23)
Top view of Sepam with MES120, flush-mounted in front panel with spring clips.
Mounting plate: 0.11 in (3 mm) thick.
AMT880 mounting plate
117
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
a
DE52813
3
Base Unit
Sepam Series 80
b
c
CCA634
Ia
Van
Ib
Vbn
Ic
Vcn
(<11.8 ft, 3 m)
CCA634
I’a
I’b
I’c
I’r
Functional
ground
118
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Connection
Connection Characteristics
Connector
A , E
C1 , C2
DE51845
D1 , D2
Reference
Wiring
Screw-type
CCA620
b wiring with no fittings :
v 1 wire with max. cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (≥ AWG 24-12)
or 2 wires with max. cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (≥ AWG
24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (.31 in to .39 in)
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 x 1.5 mm² wire (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 x 2.5 mm² wire (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
v wire length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
6.35 mm ring lugs
CCA622
b 6.35 mm ring or spade lugs (1/4”)
b maximum wire cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(≥ AWG 24-12)
b stripped length: 6 mm (.24 in)
b use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs on the wires
b maximum of 2 ring or spade lugs per terminal
b tightening torque: 1.2 nm (13.27 lb-in)
CCA612
Green RJ45 plug
Black RJ45 plug
Ring lug
Functional ground
B1 , B2
3
Type
4 mm ring lugs
CCA630, CCA634 for
connection of 1 A or 5 A CTs
RJ45 plug
CCA671, for connecting three
LPCT sensors
CAUTION
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF
NUISANCE TRIPPING
If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or
is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are
no longer active and all the Sepam output relays
are dropped out. Check that this operating mode
and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with
your installation.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in
equipment damage and unwanted shutdown
of the electrical installation.
CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft)
CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
CCA774: L = 4 m (13.1 ft)
CCA785 for MCS025 module: L = 2 m (6.6 ft)
Grounding braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
b flat copper braid with cross-section u 9 mm²
b maximum length: 300 mm (11.8 in)
b wire cross-section 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
b tightening torque: 1.2 Nm (13.27 lb-in)
Integrated with LPCT sensor
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions
b NEVER work alone
b Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance of this equipment,
disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits are live until
they have been completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay particular
attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of power,
including the possibility of backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off
b Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional
ground
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
119
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
a
b
DE52814
3
Base Unit
Sepam B83
c
Ia
Van
Ib
Vbn
Ic
Vcn
(<11.8 ft, 3 m)
V’a
V’b
V’c
V’r
a
b
Functional
ground
c
Connection Characteristics
Connector
B1
B2
Type
Reference
Wiring
4 mm ring lugs
CCA630, for connection of 1 A
or 5 A CTs
CCT640
1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
Screw-type
For connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,
: see Page 126.
CAUTION
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF
NUISANCE TRIPPING
If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or
is in fail-safe position, the protection functions are
no longer active and all the Sepam output relays
are dropped out. Check that this operating mode
and the watchdog relay wiring are compatible with
your installation.
Failure to follow this instruction can result in
equipment damage and unwanted shutdown
of the electrical installation.
120
VT wiring: same as wiring for the CCA620
Grounding connection: by 4 mm ring lug
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
b Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance of this equipment,
disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits are live until
they have been completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay particular
attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of power,
including the possibility of backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional
ground.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Sepam C86
DE52815
a
3
b
c
CCA634
Ia
Van
Ib
Vbn
Ic
Vcn
Ir
Vr
(<11.8 ft, 3 m)
CCA634
I’a
I’b
I’c
I’r
Functional
ground
Connector
B1
Type
Reference
Wiring
4 mm ring lugs
CCA630, for connection of 1 A
or 5 A CTs
CCA671, for connection of 3
LPCT sensors
CCA630, for connection of 1
A, 2A or 5 A CTs
1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
RJ45 plug
B2
Functional ground
4 mm ring lugs
Ring lugs
For connectors A , E , C1 , C2 , D1 , D2 ,
Integrated with LPCT sensor
1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10)
Grounding braid, to be connected to cubicle grounding:
b flat copper braid with cross-section ≥ 9 mm²
b maximum length: 300 mm
: see Page 127.
121
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Phase Current Inputs
Variant 1: Phase Current Measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)
3
b
Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector.
CCA630/
CCA634
c
DE80089
a
Measuring the three phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Ia
Parameters
Ib
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (In)
Ic
5 A CT or 1 A CT
Ia, Ib, Ic
1 A to 6250 A
Variant 2: Phase Current Measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs
b
Connection of two 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector.
c
DE52773
a
Measuring phase a and c currents is sufficient for all protection functions based on
phase current.
Ia
This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current, nor use of
ANSI 87T and 87M differential protection functions on the Sepam T87, M87, M88,
G87 and G88.
Ib
Ic
Parameters
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (In)
5 A CT or 1 A CT
Ia, Ic
1 A to 6250 A
Variant 3: Phase Current Measurement by three LPCT type sensors
DE51790
a
b
c
a
Ia
b
Ib
c
Ic
Connecting three Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the
CCA671 connector. Sepam goes into fail-safe position if less than three sensors are
connected.
Measuring the three phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
The IN parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from
the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630,
666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. The parameter is set in the SFT2841 software. It is
completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA671 connector. It is
not possible to use LPCT sensors for the following measurements:
b phase-current measurements for Sepam T87, M88 and G88 with ANSI 87T
transformer differential protection (connectors B1 and B2 )
b phase-current measurements for Sepam B83 (connector B1 )
b unbalance-current measurements for Sepam C86 (connector B2 ).
Parameters
Sensor type
Number of CTs
Rated current (In)
LPCT
Ia, Ib, Ic
25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000,
1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter IN must be set twice:
b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool
b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA671 connector
122
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Base Unit
Residual Current Inputs
Variant 1: Residual Current Calculation by Sum of Three Phase Currents
Description
Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents Ia, Ib,
and Ic, measured by three 1 A or 5 A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.
See current input connection diagrams.
Parameters
Residual Current
Sum of three Is
Rated Residual Current
INr = IN, CT primary current
Measuring Range
0.01 to 40 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
Variant 2: Residual Current Measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 Zero Sequence CT (standard connection)
a
Description
Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral
systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.
c
DE80083
b
Parameters
Residual Current
2 A rating CSH
20 A rating CSH
Rated Residual Current
INr = 2 A
INr = 20 A
Measuring Range
0.1 to 40 A
0.2 to 400 A
Variant 3: Residual Current Measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634
c
b
DE80086
a
Ia
Description
Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT
Ib
Ic
DE80087
a
b
Parameters
Residual Current
1 A CT
5 A CT
Rated Residual Current
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN, CT primary current
Measuring Range
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
c
Ia
Ib
Ic
123
3
Base Unit
Residual Current Inputs
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Variant 4: Residual Current Measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 Interposing Ring CT
3
b
Description
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to
measure residual current:
b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH
primary
b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH
primary.
c
DE52848
a
b
Parameters
Ir
Residual Current
1 A CT
5 A CT
Rated Residual Current
INr = IN, CT primary current
INr = IN, CT primary current
Measuring Range
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
c
DE52849
a
I’r
Ia
Ib
Ic
I’r
Ir
DE80102
Variant 5: Residual Current Measurement by Zero Sequence CT with Ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
a
b
c
Description
The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV zero sequence CT with a ratio
of 1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows
the continued use of existing zero sequence CTs on the installation.
Parameters
Residual Current
Rated Residual Current
Measuring Range
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
ACE990 - range 1
INr = Ik.n (1)
(0.00578 ≤ k ≤ 0.04)
ACE990 - range 2
INr = Ik.n (1)
0.01 to 20 INr (minimum 0.1 A)
(0.00578 ≤ k ≤ 0.26316)
(1) n = number of zero sequence CT turns
k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam
124
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Phase Voltage Inputs
Residual Voltage Input
Main Channels
Phase Voltage Input Connection Cariants
a
a
b
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vbn
Vcn
Vcn
Measurement of the three line-to-neutral voltages
allows the calculation of residual voltage, VrΣ
This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage
Variant 3: Measuring one
line-to-line voltage (1 VLL)
Variant 4: Measuring one line-to-neutral voltage (1 VLn)
a
a
b
b
DE51798
DE51797
c
Van
c
3
Variant 2: Measuring two line-to-line voltages (2 VLL)
DE51796
DE51795
Variant 1: Measuring three
line-to-neutral voltages
(3 VLn, standard connection)
c
Van
Van
Vbn
Vbn
Vcn
Vcn
This variant does not allow the calculation of residual
voltage
This variant does not allow the calculation of residual voltage
Residual Voltage Input Connection Variants
Variant 6: Measuring residual voltage VLnt
in generator neutral point
a
a
b
b
DE51800
DE51799
Variant 5: Measuring
residual voltage Vr
c
c
Van
Van
Vbn
Vbn
Vcn
Vcn
125
Phase Voltage Inputs
Residual Voltage Input
Additional Channels for Sepam B83
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Additional Phase Voltage Input Connection
Variants
3
Variant 1: Measuring three
line-to-neutral voltages
(3 VLn’, standard connection)
Variant 2: Measuring two line-to-line voltages (2 VLL’)
a
a
b
c
DE51802
c
DE51801
b
V‘an
V‘an
V‘bn
V‘bn
V‘cn
V‘cn
Measurement of the 3 line-to-neutral voltages allows
the calculation of residual voltage, V’rΣ
This variant does not allow for calculating residual voltage
Variant 3: Measuring one
line-to-line voltage (1 VLL’)
Variant 4: Measuring one line-to-neutral voltage (1 VLn’)
a
a
b
c
DE51804
c
DE51803
b
V‘an
V‘an
V‘bn
V‘bn
V‘cn
V‘cn
This variant does not allow for calculating residual
voltage.
This variant does not allow for calculating residual voltage.
Additional Residual Voltage Input Connection
Variant 5: Measuring Residual Voltage V’r
b
c
DE51805
a
V‘an
V‘bn
V‘cn
126
Phase Voltage Inputs
Residual Voltage Input
Additional Channel for Sepam B80
Connecting to Measure One Additional
Voltage
3
DE51899
a
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
This connection should be used to measure:
b three line-to-neutral voltages Van, Vbn, Vcn on bus number 1
b one additional line-to-neutral voltage V’an (or one additional line-to-line voltage
V'ab) on bus number 2
a
DE51898
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
b
c
Van
Vbn
Vcn
This connection should be used to measure:
b two line-to-line voltages Vab, Vbc, and one residual voltage Vr on bus number 1
b one additional line-to-line voltage V'ab (or one additional line-to-neutral voltage
V’an) on bus number 2.
127
Connection Diagrams
Sepam Series 80
Phase Voltage Inputs
Residual Voltage Input
Available Functions
The availability of certain protection and metering functions depends on the phase
and residual voltages measured by Sepam. The table below gives the voltage input
connection variants for which for each protection and metering function dependent on
measured voltages is available. For example, the directional overcurrent protection
function (ANSI 67N/67NC) uses residual voltage Vr as a polarization value. It is
therefore operational in the following cases:
b measuring the three line-to-neutral voltages and calculating
VrΣ (3 V + VrΣ, variant 1)
b measuring residual voltage Vr (variant 5).
The protection and metering functions which do not appear in the table below are
available regardless of the voltages measured.
3
3 V + VrΣ
2 VLL
1 VLL
1 VLn
(var. 1)
Vr
VLnt
(var. 2)
Vr
VLnt
(var. 3)
Vr
VLnt
(var. 4)
Vr
VLnt
(v. 5)
(v. 6)
(v. 5)
(v. 6)
(v. 5)
(v. 6)
(v. 5)
(v. 6)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
b
b
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Line-to-line voltage Vab, Vbc, Vac or V'ab, V'bc, V'ac
bv
bv
b
Line-to-neutral voltage Van, Vbn, Vcn, or V’an, V’bn, V’cn
bv
bv
b
Phase Voltages Measured
(Connection Variant)
Residual Voltage Measured
–
(Connection Variant)
Protection Functions Dependent on Voltages Measured
Directional phase overcurrent
Directional ground fault
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive active overpower
Directional active underpower
Field loss (underimpedance)
Pole slip, phase shift
Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Underimpedance
Inadvertent energization
100 % stator ground fault
Overexcitation (V/Hz)
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (LL or LN)
Overvoltage (LL or LN)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
67
67N/67NC
32P
32Q
37P
40
78PS
50V/51V
21B
50/27
64G2/27TN
24
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
81R
–
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
–
b
b
bv
bv
b
b
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
bv
bv
bv
b
bv
bv
bv
bv
–
b
b
bvU
bvU
bvU
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
bvU
bvU
bvU
bvU
bvU
bv
bv
b
b
bvU
bvU
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Vab,
V'ab
Vab
Vab
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
Measurements Dependent on Voltages Measured
b
bv bv
b
bv
b
b
Neutral point voltage VLnt
b
b
Third harmonic neutral point or residual voltage
bv bv
b
bv
bv
b
Positive sequence voltage V1 or V’1 /
negative sequence voltage V2 or V’2
bv bv
bv
bv
bv
bv
bvU
Frequency
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Active/reactive/apparent power: P, Q, S
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Maximum demand power Pmax, Qmax
Active / reactive / apparent power per phase :
b (1) b (1)
b (1)
b (1)
Pa/Pb/Pc, Qa/Qb/Qc, Sa/Sb/Sc
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Power factor
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Calculated active and reactive energy (±Wh, ±VARh)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Total harmonic distortion, voltage Vthd
b
b
b
b
Phase displacement φr, φ’r
b
b
b
b
b
b
Phase displacement φa, φb, φc
b
b
b
b
b
b
Apparent positive sequence impedance Z1
b
b
b
b
b
b
Apparent line-to-line impedances Zab, Zbv, Zac
b Function available on main voltage channels.
v Function available on Sepam B83 additional voltage channels.
U Function available on Sepam B80 additional voltage channel, according to the type of the additional voltage measured.
(1) If all three phase currents are measured
Residual voltage Vr or V’r
128
Van,
V’an
bv
bv
b
b
b
b
b
b
Van,
V’an
bv
Van
b
b
b
b
bv
b
b
bvU
bv
bv
Pa/
Qa/Sa
Pa/
Qa/Sa
Pa/
Qa/Sa
b
b
b
b
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 80
Additional Modules
and Accessories
Software
0
131
Sepam Software
131
SFT2841 Setting and Operating Software
132
Function
SFT2841 Connection to Sepam
Adapting the Predefined Functions
132
134
135
SFT2826 Disturbance Recording Data Display Software
136
SFT850 Configuration Software for IEC 61850 Protocol
137
SFT2885 Programming Software - Logipam
138
Logic Input/Output Modules
140
MES114 Modules
140
Logic Input/Output Assignment of Sepam Series 20
142
Logic Input/Output Assignment of Sepam Series 40
143
MES120, MES120G, MES120H 14 Input/6 Output Module
144
Presentation
Installation
Logic Input/Output Assignment
144
145
146
Remote Modules
148
Selection Guide and Connection
148
MET1482 Temperature Sensor Module
149
MSA141 Analog Output Module
151
DSM303 Remote Advanced UMI Module
152
MCS025 Synchro-Check Module
154
Communication Accessories
Selection Guide
Communication Interfaces
158
158
159
Communication Interface Connection
159
ACE9492 2-wire RS485 Network Interface
160
ACE959 4-wire RS485 Network Interface
161
ACE937 Fiber Optic Interface
162
ACE969TP and ACE969FO Interfaces Network
163
Description
Connection
165
166
129
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 80
Additional Modules
and Accessories
Converters
4
168
ACE9092 RS232 / RS485 Converter
168
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS485 / RS485 Converters
170
Sepam ECI850 Server for IEC 61850
172
Ethernet EGX100 Gateway
176
Ethernet EGX400 Server
177
WPG Software Tool HTML Page Generator
180
Sensors
130
0
181
Selection Guide
181
Voltage Transformers
182
1 A / 5 A Current Transformers
183
LPCT Type Current Sensors
186
Test Accessories
187
CSH120 and CSH200 Zero Sequence CTs
189
CSH30 Interposing Ring CT
191
ACE990 Zero Sequence CT Interface
192
Software
Sepam Software
Presentation
4
Four types of Sepam PC software are available:
b SFT2841 setting and operating software
b SFT2826 disturbance recording data display software
b SFT2885 programming software for the Sepam Series 80 (Logipam)
b SFT850 advanced-configuration software for IEC 61850 protocol
SFT2841 and SFT2826 Software
SFT2841 and SFT2826 software is provided on the same CD-ROM as the Sepam
documentation in PDF format.
PC Connection Cable
The CCA783 PC connection cable (ordered separately) is designed to connect a PC
to the RS232 port on the front panel of a Sepam unit in order to use the SFT2841
software in point-to-point connected mode.
The USB/RS232 TSXCUSB232 converter may be used with the CCA783 connection
cable for connection to a USB port.
SFT2885 Software
SFT2885 is available on a separate CD-ROM.
SFT850 Software
SFT850 is available on a separate CD-ROM
Minimum Configuration Required
SFT2841 and SFT2826 Software
Operating systems
RAM
Space on disk
Microsoft 2000/XP
128 MB (32 MB for Windows 98)
120 MB
SFT2885
Operating systems
RAM
Space on disk
Microsoft 2000/XP
64 MB
20 MB
SFT850
Operating systems
RAM
Space on disk
Microsoft 2000/XP
64 MB
40 MB
131
Software
SFT2841 Setting and Operating
Software
Function
The SFT2841 software is the setting and operating tool for Sepam Series 20,
Series 40, and Series 80.
It may be used:
b prior to commissioning and without connection to Sepam, to prepare Sepam
protection and parameter settings
b during commissioning, on a PC connected point-to-point to the front panel Sepam:
v to load, unload and modify Sepam protection and parameter settings
v to obtain all measurements and useful information during commissioning
b during operation, on a PC connected to a set of Sepam relays via an E-LAN
multipoint communication network:
v to manage the protection system
v to monitor the status of the electrical network
v to run diagnostics on any incidents affecting the electrical network
4
PE50540
Preparation of Sepam Parameter and Protection Settings in
Unconnected Mode
b
b
b
b
configuration of Sepam and optional modules, and entry of general settings
enabling/disabling of functions and entry of protection settings
adaptation of predefined control and monitoring functions
creation of personalized mimic diagrams for local display
Sepam Commissioning via a Point-to-Point Connection to the
Front Panel
PE50304
SFT2841: Sepam Series 80 hardware configuration.
b access to all functions available in unconnected mode, after entering the protectionsetting or parameter-setting password
b transfer of Sepam parameter and protection setting file, prepared in unconnected
mode (downloading function), protected by the parameter-setting password
b display of all measurements and useful information during commissioning
b display of logic input, logic output and LED status
b test of logic outputs
b display of Logipam variables
b setting of Logipam parameters (configuration bits, timers, etc.)
b modification of passwords
Management of Protection Functions and Network Diagnostics
with an E-LAN Multipoint Network Connection
b reading all Sepam protection and parameter settings, with modifications following
entry of the protection-setting or parameter-setting password
b display of all the Sepam measurement data
b display of Sepam, switchgear and network diagnosis data
b display of time-stamped alarm messages
b retrieval of disturbance recording data
SFT2841: output testing.
Efficient, Easy-to-Use Software
b
b
b
b
b
PE50274
menus and icons for fast, direct access to the data required
guided navigation to go through all the data input screens in the natural order
all data on the same function together in the same screen
trilingual software: English, French, Spanish
on-line help, with all the technical information needed to use
and implement Sepam
b familiar file management in Microsoft Windows environment:
v all file management services included: copy / paste, save, etc.
v printing parameter and protection settings in standard layout
SFT2841: alarm history.
132
Software
SFT2841 Setting and Operating
Software
Function
PE50302
The table below gives the SFT2841 functions available for the Sepam Series: Sepam
Series 20, Series 40, and Series 80.
NC: function available in unconnected mode.
S: function available with SFT2841 connected via Sepam front panel.
E: function available with SFT2841 connected to Sepam via E-LAN communication network.
SFT2841: Sepam Series 80 sensor parameter setting.
Functions
Series 20 Series 40 Series 80
Management
NC
S
E
NC
S
E
NC
S
E
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
On-line help
Managing parameter and protection setting
files: creation, saving, downloading and
uploading
Downloading and uploading parameter and
protection setting files
Exporting parameter and protection settings
in a text file
Printing parameter and protection settings
Modifying passwords, one for parameter
setting and one for protection setting
(1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
PE50541
Sepam Parameter Setting
Displaying parameter settings
Hardware configuration and parameter entry
protected by parameter setting password
Graphical parameter setting assistance
Standard configuration for IEC 61850 network
b
b
b
b
b
b
Protection Setting
Displaying protection settings
Entry of protection settings, protected by
protection setting password
Defining customized tripping curve
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Adapting Predefined Functions
PE50275
SFT2841: Sepam Series 80 application, with protection
function measurement origin.
Display and modification of the control matrix
Logic equation editing
Number of instructions
Number of dedicated remote
indications
Display of logic equations
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
100
10
200
20
b
b
Load the Logipam program
Setting of Logipam parameters
Assignment of LEDs on front
Editing user messages
b
b
b
Number of user messages
Editing of personalized mimic diagram
b
b
b
b
b
30
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
100
b
b
b
Assistance in Commissioning and Operating the Installation
PE50276
SFT2841: protection settings.
Display of all Sepam measurement data
b
b
b
b
b
b
Display of switchgear diagnosis assistance
data
Display of machine operating assistance data
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Display of time-stamped alarm messages
b
b
b
b
b
b
Tripping context
b
b
b
b
b
b
Retrieval of disturbance recording files
b
b
b
b
b
b
Display of Logipam variables
b
b
b
b
b
b
Display of logic input/output status
b
b
b
b
b
b
Output testing
b
b
b
b
b
b
Sepam diagnosis
b
b
b
b
b
b
(1) Except for logic equations and personalized messages.
SFT2841: Sepam diagnosis.
133
4
SFT2841 Setting and Operating
Software
SFT2841 Connection to Sepam
Software
SFT2841 Connection to the Front Panel of a Sepam
4
Connection of the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of
Sepam Series 20, Series 40, or Series 80 using the CCA783 cable or the USB/RS232
(TSXCUSB232) converter + CCA783.
DE52069
DE53111
Sepam™ Series 80
SFT2841 Connection to a Set of Sepam Relays
The SFT2841 can be connected to a set of Sepam relays, themselves connected to a
E-LAN communication network in one of the three architectures presented below.
These connections do not require any further software development work.
134
Sepam™ Series 20
Sepam™ Series 20
Sepam™ Series 40
Sepam™ Series 40
Sepam™ Series 80
Sepam™ Series 80
Telephone-Line Connection
b connection a set of Sepam to a
Modbus RS485 network
b RS485-RTC link via an RS485
modem (Wertermo TD-34 for
example)
b connection of the PC via its modem
port.
DE53110
RS485 Serial Connection
b connection a set of Sepam to a
Modbus RS485 network
b connection of the PC via its RS232
port, using the ACE9092 interface.
DE53109
DE53108
Ethernet Connection
b connection a set of Sepam to a Modbus RS485
network
b Ethernet RS485 link via the EGX100 or EGX400
gateway or the ECI850 server
b connection of the PC via its Ethernet port.
Sepam™ Series 20
Sepam™ Series 20
Sepam™ Series 40
Sepam™ Series 40
Sepam™ Series 80
Sepam™ Series 80
SFT2841 Setting and Operating
Software
Adapting the Predefined Functions
Software
Logic Equation Editor (Sepam Series 40 and Series 80)
4
PE50277
The logic equation editor included in the SFT2841 software can be used to:
b complete protection function processing:
v additional interlocking
v conditional blocking/validation of functions
b adapt predefined control functions: particular circuit breaker or recloser control
sequences
Note: the use of the logic equation editor excludes the possibility of using the Logipam
programming software.
SFT2841: logic equation editor.
A logic equation is created by grouping logic input data received from:
b protection functions
b logic inputs
b local control commands transmitted by the mimic-based UMI
b remote control commands
This grouping is accomplished by using the Boolean operators AND, OR, XOR, NOT,
and automation functions such as time delays, bi-stables and time programmer.
Equation input is assisted and syntax checking is done systematically.
The result of an equation may then be:
b assigned to a logic output, LED or message from the control matrix
b transmitted by the communication link, as a new remote indication
b utilized by the circuit breaker/contactor control function to trip, close or block
breaking device closing
b used to block or reset a protection function
Alarms and Operating Messages (Sepam Series 40 and
Series 80)
New alarm and operating messages may be created using the SFT2841 software.
The new messages are added to the list of existing messages and may be assigned
via the control matrix for display:
b on Sepam’s advanced UMI
b in the SFT2841 “Alarms” and “Alarm History” screens
PE50542
Local-Control Mimic Diagram (Sepam Series 80)
Main #2
52
Ia = 175 A
Vab = 6.61 kV
P = 1.81 MW
Q = 860 kvar
The local-control mimic diagram displayed on the UMI can be personalized by
adapting one of the supplied, predefined mimic diagrams or by creating a diagram
from scratch.
The mimic-diagram editor can be used to:
b create a fixed, bitmap background (128 x 240 pixels) using a standard drawing tool
b create animated symbols or use predefined animated symbols to represent the
electrotechnical devices or other objects
b assign the logic inputs or internal status conditions that modify the animated
symbols. For example, the logic inputs for the circuit-breaker position must be linked
to the circuit-breaker symbol to enable the display of the open and closed conditions
b assign the logic outputs or internal status conditions that are activated when an
opening or closing command are issued for the symbol
b display the current, voltage and power measurements on the mimic diagram
SFT2841: mimic-diagram editor.
PE50305
Control Matrix
The control matrix is used for simple assignment of data from:
b protection functions
b control and monitoring functions
b logic inputs
b logic equations or the Logipam program to the following output data:
v logic outputs
v 9 LEDs on the front of Sepam
v messages for local display
v triggering of disturbance recording
SFT2841: control matrix.
135
Software
Function
The SFT2826 software is used to display, analyze, and print disturbance data recorded
by Sepam. It uses COMTRADE (IEEE standard: Common format for transient data
exchange for power systems) files.
Mt10623
4
SFT2826 Disturbance Recording
Data Display Software
Transferring Disturbance Recording Data
Before they are analyzed by SFT2826, the disturbance recording data must be
transferred from Sepam to the PC:
b by the SFT2841 software
b or by the Modbus communication link
Analysis of Disturbance Recording Data
SFT2826: analysis of a disturbance data record.
b
b
b
b
b
selection of analog signals and logic data for display
zoom and measurement of time between events
display of all numerical values recorded
exporting of data in file format
printing of curves and/or numerical values recorded
Characteristics
The SFT2826 software comes with the SFT2841 software:
b four languages: English, French, Spanish, Italian
b on-line help with description of software functions
136
Software
SFT850 Configuration Software for
IEC 61850 Protocol
Function
The SFT850 software is used to easily create, modify and consult the SCL (Substation
Configuration Language) configuration files for the IEC 61850 communication protocol:
b CID (Configured IED Description) file for configuration of a device connected to an
IEC 61850 network
b SCD (Substation Configuration Description) file for IEC 61850 configuration of
substation equipment.
The SFT850 software supplements the standard IEC 61850 configuration created with
the SFT2841 software in cases where the configuration must be precisely adapted to
system requirements.
Adding or Deleting Equipment
The SFT850 software can be used to add or delete connected equipment in the IEC
61850 configuration. If a Sepam unit is added, the software uses the supplied ICD (IED
Capability Description) file to start configuration.
Equipment Connection
The SFT850 software describes the data for equipment connection to the network.
Editing the Equipment Configuration
The configuration of a given device described in a CID or SCD file can be modified in
the following ways:
b add, modify or delete datasets. A dataset is used to group data and optimized
communication
b add, modify or delete RCBs (Report Control Block). A Report Control Block defines
dataset transmission conditions
b add, modify or delete GCBs (Goose Control Block). A Goose Control Block defines
how data is exchanged between Sepam units
b modify dead measurement bands. This parameter is used to optimize
communication in that measurements are transmitted only if they have changed
significantly
Generating CID files
The SFT850 software can generate the CID file for each device on the basis of an SCD
file.
137
4
Software
SFT2885 Programming Software Logipam
Function
4
The SFT2885 programming software (called Logipam) is a special option intended
exclusively for the Sepam Series 80 and can be used to:
b adapt predefined control and monitoring functions
b program specific control and monitoring functions, either to replace the predefined
versions or to create completely new functions, to provide all the functions required
by the application.
It is made up of:
b a ladder-language program editor used to address all Sepam data and to program
complex control functions
b a simulator for complete program debugging
b a code generator to run the program on Sepam
The ladder-language program and the data used can be documented and a complete file
can be printed.
Only the Sepam Series 80 with a cartridge containing the Logipam SFT080 option
can run the control and monitoring functions programmed by the Logipam
SFT2885 software.
The complete Logipam software is made up of the executable program run by Sepam
and the source program that can be modified by the Logipam SFT2885 programming
software.
The SFT2841 setting and operating software, required for implementation of the
Logipam program, offers the following functions:
b association of the complete Logipam program with the Sepam parameter and
protection settings
b loading and unloading of Logipam program, parameters and settings in the Sepam
cartridge
b running functions programmed with Logipam:
v display of the status of Logipam internal bits
v setting Logipam parameters: configuration bits, timers
DE52073
Operating Principle
138
Software
SFT2885 Programming Software Logipam
PE50257
Characteristics
4
Program Structure
A ladder-language program is made up of a series of rungs executed sequentially:
b maximum 1000 lines with 9 contacts and 1 coil maximum per line
b with a maximum total number of 5000 contacts and coils
Comments can be made for each line.
Sections
The program can be broken down into sections and subsections to clarify the structure
and facilitate reading. It is possible to set up three levels of sections. Comments can be
added for each section, and execution of each section can be subjected to conditions.
SFT2885: ladder-language program, structured in sections
Variable Editor
Each variable is defined by a fixed identifier and can be linked to a name or a
comment. The programmer can decide to work directly with the identifiers or with the
linked names. The list of the variables used and the cross references can be consulted
during programming.
PE50265
Graphic Elements in the Ladder Language
The graphic elements are the instructions in the ladder language:
b NO and NC contacts
b rising and falling-edge detection contacts
b direct or negated coils
b set and reset coils
b coils and contacts linked to timers, counters and clocks
Available Resources
SFT2885: variable editor
Sepam Variables
All the data used by Sepam functions can be addressed by Logipam:
b all logic inputs and outputs
b all remote-control commands and remote indications
(the remote-control commands and remote indication used in the Logipam program
are no longer used by the predefined functions)
b all protection-function inputs and outputs
b all inputs and outputs for the predefined control and monitoring functions
b all inputs and outputs for symbols in the mimic-based UMI
b all system data
Logipam Internal Variables
b 64 configuration bits to parameter program processing, settable via the SFT2841
software and the display
b 128 bits used by the control matrix to control LEDs, messages and logic outputs
b 128 internal bits that are saved
b 512 internal bits that are not saved
PE50266
Logipam Functions
b 60 timers that can be set for a rising edge (TON) or a falling edge (TOF)
b 24 incremental counters with adjustable thresholds
b 4 clocks for a given week
Debugging Tools
The Logipam software offers a complete set of tools for program debugging:
b step-by-step or continuous program execution to simulate the programmed
functions
b color animation of the rungs and all program variables
b grouping in a table of all program variables requiring monitoring
Documentation
The application file can be printed in part or in whole. It can also be personalized with
such items as a front page, title block, and general description of the program.
SFT2885: program debugging
139
Logic Input/Output
Modules
Function
The four outputs included on the Sepam Series 20 and 40 may be extended by adding
an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in three versions:
b MES114: 10 DC inputs voltage from 24 V DC to 250 V DC
b MES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC
b MES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC.
PE50476
4
MES114 Modules
Characteristics
MES114 Module
Weight
Operating
temperature
Environmental
characteristics
Logical Inputs
Voltage
Range
10 input/4 output MES114 module.
0.28 kg (0.617 lb)
-13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
MES114
MES114E
24 to
250 V DC
19.2 to
275 V DC
/
3 mA
14 V DC
110 to
125 V DC
88 to
150 VV DC
/
3 mA
82 V DC
Frequency
Typical consumption
Typical switching
threshold
Input limit At state 0 ≥ 19 V DC
voltage
At state 1 ≤ 6 V DC
Isolation of inputs from Enhanced
other isolated groups
Isolation between
inputs
Enhanced
MES114F
110 V AC
220 to
250 V DC
88 to
176 to
132 V AC 275 V DC
47 to 63 Hz /
3 mA
3 mA
58 V AC
154 V DC
≥ 88 V DC
≤ 75 V DC
Enhanced
220 to
240 V AC
176 to
264 V AC
47 to 63 Hz
3 mA
120 V
AC
≥ 88 V AC ≥ 176 V DC ≥ 176 V AC
≤ 22 V AC ≤ 137 V DC ≤≥ 48 V AC
Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
Enhanced
Enhanced Enhanced
Enhanced
O11 Control Relay Output
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
Making capacity
Isolation of outputs
from other isolated
groups
Isolation between
outputs
DC
AC
(47.5 to
63 Hz)
Resistive
load
Load
L/R < 20 ms
Load
L/R < 40 ms
Load
cos j > 0.3
24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC
-
220 V DC
-
250 V CC
100 to
240 V AC
8A
8 / 4A
8A
0.7 A
8A
0.3 A
8A
0.2 A
8A
8A
6 / 2A
0.5 A
0.2 A
-
-
4 / 1A
0.2 A
0.1 A
-
-
-
-
-
-
5A
220 V DC
-
250 V DC
100 to
240 V AC
2A
0.3 A
2A
0.2 A
2A
-
0.15 A
-
-
-
-
1A
< 15 A for 200 ms
Enhanced
Enhanced
O12 to O14 Indication Relay Output
Voltage
DC
AC
(47.5 to
63 Hz)
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
2A
2A
Resistive
2 / 1A
0.6 A
load
Load
2 / 1A
0.5 A
L/R < 20 ms
Load
cos j > 0.3
< 15 A for 200 ms
Enhanced
Making capacity
Isolation of outputs
in relation to other
isolated groups
Isolation between
outputs
140
Enhanced
24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC
-
Logic Input/Output
Modules
MES114 Modules
DE52153
Description
4
L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors
L : connectors for 4 relay outputs:
b O11: 1 control relay output
b O12 to O14: 3 annunciation relay outputs
M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14
K : connectors for 6 logic inputs:
b I21: 1 independent logic input
b I22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.
1 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit.
2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to:
b V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting)
b V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs.
3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and
MES114F input voltages.
The parameter setting status can be accessed in the “Sepam Diagnosis” screen of the
SFT2841 software tool. Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting)
blocks the “operating time measurement” function.
DE51683
Assembly
1. Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit.
2. Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2.
3. Tighten the mounting screw 3.
Connection
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.
DE51685
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Wiring for connectors L , M and K :
b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section ≥ AWG 24-12 (0.2 to 2.5 mm2)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section ≥ AWG 24-18 (0.2 to 1 mm2)
v stripped length: 0.315 to 0.39 in (8 to 10 mm)
b Wiring with fittings:
v terminal 5, recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18)
v wire length: 0.32 in (8.2 mm)
v stripped length: 0.31 in (8 mm)
141
Logic Input/Output
Modules
Logic Input/Output Assignment
of Sepam Series 20
Using preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter setting
and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type of Sepam.
The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set the
control and monitoring function parameters.
4
Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are
available at the same time. For example, if the zone selective interlocking function is
used, the switching of groups of settings function can not be used.
Input/Output Assignment by Application
Functions
S20
S23
T20
T23
M20
B21 - B22
Assignment
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I11
b (2)
b
b (3)
b (2)
b
b (3)
External tripping 3 (1)
Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message)
Rotor rotation detection
Thermistor tripping (1)
Block ground fault protection
b
b
b (4)
b
b (4)
b
b
End of charging position
Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message)
Thermistor alarm (1)
External tripping 5 and 50BF activation (1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Block remote control, excluding TC1 (1)
Block remote control, including TC1 (1)
SF6-1
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I25
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
O1
Logic Inputs
Open position
Closed position
Zone selective interlocking, receive blocking input
Switching groups of settings A/B
External reset
External tripping 4 (1)
External tripping 1 (1)
External network synchronization
External tripping 2 (1)
Motor re-acceleration
SF6-2
Change of thermal settings
Block thermal overload
Block recloser
Logic Outputs
Tripping
Block closing
Watchdog
Close command
I12
I13
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I14
b
I23
I21
I22
b
b
I24
b
I26
O2
O4
O11
Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications.
(1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix “NEG” (negative) for undervoltage type operation.
(2) Buchholz/Gas trip message.
(3) Thermostat trip message.
(4) Pressure trip message.
142
Logic Input/Output Assignment
of Sepam Series 40
Logic Input/Output
Modules
Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below.
b all the logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for
the SFT2841 customization functions according to specific application needs:
v in the control matrix, to link inputs to output relays, LED indications or display
messages
v in the logic equation editor, as logic equation variables
b the control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation.
Functions
S40, S41
Assignment: Logic Inputs by Application
S42
T40, T42 M41
G40
Assignment
Logic Inputs
Open position
Closed position
Zone selective interlocking, receive blocking input 1
b
b
b
Zone selective interlocking, receive blocking input 2
Switching of groups of settings A/B
External reset
External tripping 1
External tripping 2
External tripping 3
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Thermostat tripping
Pressure tripping
Thermistor tripping
Buchholz/gas alarm
Thermostat alarm
Pressure alarm
Thermistor alarm
Block remote control
SF6
Block recloser
External synchronization
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Switching of thermal settings
Close command
Phase voltage transformer fuse melting
Residual voltage transformer fuse melting
External positive active energy counter
External negative active energy counter
External positive reactive energy counter
External negative reactive energy counter
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I13
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
b
b
Free
Free
Free
Free
Block undercurrent
Open command
Free
Free
Rotor rotation detection
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I12
Free
Motor re-acceleration
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I11
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Block thermal overload
Block closing
b
b
b
Free
Buchholz/gas tripping
End of charging position
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I21
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Logic Outputs
Tripping
Block closing
Watchdog
Close command
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
O1
O2
O4
O11
Note: The logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 matrix for other non predefined applications.
143
4
Logic Input/Output
Modules
MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 Input/6 Output Module
Presentation
Function
The five output relays included on the Sepam Series 80 base unit can be extended
by adding one, two, or three MES120 modules with 14 DC logic inputs and 6 outputs
relays, 1 control relay output and 5 indication relay outputs.
PE50020
4
Two modules are available for the different input supply voltage ranges and offer
different switching thresholds:
b MES120, 14 inputs 24 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
14 V DC
b MES120G, 14 inputs 220 V DC to 250 V DC with a typical switching threshold of 155
V DC
b MES120H, 14 inputs 110 V DC to 125 V DC with a typical switching threshold of
82 V DC.
MES120 14 input / 6 output module.
Characteristics
MES120 / MES120G / MES120H Modules
Weight
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0,38 kg (0,83 lb)
-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
MES120
MES120G
MES120H
Voltage
Range
Typical consumption
Typical switching threshold
Input limit voltage
24 à 250 V DC
19.2 à 275 V DC
3 mA
14 V DC
< 6 V DC
> 19 V DC
Enhanced
220 to 250 V DC
170 to 275 V DC
3 mA
155 V DC
< 144 V DC
> 170 V DC
Enhanced
110 to 125 V DC
88 to 150 V DC
3 mA
82 V DC
< 75 V DC
> 88 V DC
Enhanced
Logic Inputs
At state 0
At state 1
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups
Control Relay Output Ox01
Voltage
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
Resistive load
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load L/R < 40 ms
Load p.f > 0.3
Making capacity
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups
Annunciation Relay Input Ox02 to Ox06
Tension
Continue
Alternative (47.5 à 63 Hz)
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load p.f > 0.3
Isolation of inputs from other isolated groups
127 V DC
8A
0.7 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
-
220 V DC
8A
0.3 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
-
250 V DC
8A
0.2 A
-
100 à 240 V AC
8A
8A
5A
24/48 V DC
2A
2 / 1A
Enhanced
127 V DC
2A
0.5 A
-
220 V DC
2A
0.15 A
-
250 V DC
2A
0.2 A
-
100 to 240 V AC
2A
1A
Description
in.
(mm)
6.69
(170)
4.72
(120)
1.57
(40)
144
24/48 V DC
8A
8 / 4A
6 / 2A
4 / 1A
< 15 A for 200 ms
Enhanced
3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors.
1 20-pin connector for 9 logic inputs:
b Ix01 to Ix04: 4 independent logic inputs
b Ix05 to Ix09: 5 common point logic inputs.
2 7-pin connector for 5 common point logic inputs Ix10 à Ix14.
3 17-pin connector for 6 relay outputs:
b Ox01: 1 control relay output
b Ox02 to Ox06 : 5 indication relay outputs.
Addressing of MES120 module inputs / outputs:
b x = 1 for the module connected to H1
b x = 2 for the module connected to H2
b x = 3 for the module connected to H3.
4 MES120G, MES120H identification label (MES120 modules have no labels).
Logic Input/Output
Modules
MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 Input/6 Output Module
Installation
PE50026
Assembly
4
Installing an MES120 Module on the Base Unit
b insert the two pins on the MES module into the slots (1) on the base unit
b push the module flat up against the base unit to plug it into the connector H2
b partially tighten the two mounting screws (2) before locking them.
MES120 modules must be mounted in the following order:
b if only one module is required, connect it to connector (H1)
b if two modules are required, connect them to connectors (H1) and (H2)
b if three modules are required (maximum configuration), the three connectors
(H1, H2, and H3) are used.
Installation of the second MES120 module, connected to base
unit connector H2.
Connection
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
DE51645
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Wiring Connectors
b wiring without fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section ≥ AWG 24-12 (0.2 to 2.5 mm²)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section ≥ AWG 24-16 (0.2 to 1 mm²)
v stripped length: 0.31 to 0.39 in (8 to 10 mm)
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for one AWG 16 (1.5 mm²) wire
- DZ5CE025D for one AWG 12 (2.5 mm²) wire
- AZ5DE010D for two AWG 18 (1 mm²) wires
v wire length: 0.32 in (8.2 mm)
v stripped length: 0.31 in (8 mm).
145
MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 Input/6 Output Module
Logic Input/Output Assignment
Logic Input/Output
Modules
Inputs and outputs may be assigned to predefined control and monitoring functions
using the SFT2841 software, according to the uses listed in the table below. The
control logic of each input may be inverted for undervoltage type operation. All the
logic inputs, whether or not assigned to predefined functions, may be used for the
customization functions according to specific application needs:
b in the control matrix (SFT2841 software), to connect an input to a logic output, a LED
on the front of Sepam or a message for local indication on the display
b in the logic equation editor (SFT2841 software), as logic equation variables
b in Logipam (SFT2885 software) as input variables for the program in ladder
language
4
Logic Output Assignment Table
Functions
M87 M81
M88
G87 G82
G88
B80
B83
C86
Assignment
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
O1
O2 by default
O3 by default
O5
O102 by default
b
b
O103 by default
Genset shutdown
b
b
Free
De-excitation
b
b
Free
Tripping / contactor control
Block closing
Closing
Watchdog
Zone selective interlocking, blocking
send 1
S80
S81
S82
S84
T81
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Zone selective interlocking, blocking
send 2
T82
T87
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Load shedding
b
Free
AT, closing of NO circuit breaker
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Free
AT, closing of tie breaker
AT, opening of tie breaker
Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4)
Tripping of capacitor step (1 to 4)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Free
Free
Free
Free
b
b
b
Note: The logic outputs assigned by default may be freely reassigned.
Assignment Table for Logic Inputs Common to all Applications
Functions
Closed circuit breaker
Open circuit breaker
Synchronization of Sepam internal clock
via external pulse
Switching of groups of settings A/B
External reset
Grounding switch closed
Grounding switch open
External trip 1
External trip 2
External trip 3
End of charging position
Block remote control (Local)
SF6 pressure default
Block closing
Open command
Close command
Phase VT fuse blown
Vr VT fuse blown
External positive active energy meter
External negative active energy meter
External positive reactive energy meter
External negative reactive energy meter
Racked out circuit breaker
Switch A closed
Switch A open
Switch B closed
Switch B open
Closing-coil monitoring
146
S80
S81
S82
S84
T81
T82
T87
M87
M81
M88
G87
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
G82
G88
B80
B83
C86
Assignment
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I101
I102
I103
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
MES120, MES120G, MES120H
14 Input/6 Output Module
Logic Input/Output Assignment
Logic Input/Output
Modules
Functions
Block recloser
Block thermal overload
Switching of thermal settings
Blocking reception 1
Blocking reception 2
Buchholz trip
Thermostat trip
Pressure trip
Thermistor trip
Buchholz alarm
Thermostat alarm
Pressure alarm
Thermistor alarm
Rotor speed measurement
Rotor rotation detection
Motor re-acceleration
Load shedding request
Block undercurrent
Priority genset shutdown
De-excitation
Close enable (ANSI 25)
Block opposite-side remote control (local)
Block remote-control tie breaker (local)
Tie breaker open
Tie breaker closed
Opposite side open
Opposite side closed
Selector set to Manual (ANSI 43)
Selector set to Auto (ANSI 43)
Selector set to Circuit breaker (ANSI 10)
Selector set to Tie Breaker (ANSI 10)
Opposite-side circuit breaker disconnected
Tie breaker circuit breaker disconnected
Tie breaker close command
Opposite-side voltage OK
Block closing of tie breaker
Automatic closing command
External closing command 1
External closing command 2
Additional phase voltage transformer fuse
blown
Additional Vr voltage transformer fuse blown
Capacitor step 1 open
Capacitor step 1 closed
Capacitor step 2 open
Capacitor step 2 closed
Capacitor step 3 open
Capacitor step 3 closed
Capacitor step 4 open
Capacitor step 4 closed
Step 1 opening command
Step 2 opening command
Step 3 opening command
Step 4 opening command
Step 1 closing command
Step 2 closing command
Step 3 closing command
Step 4 closing command
Step 1 external trip
Step 2 external trip
Step 3 external trip
Step 4 external trip
Capacitor step 1 VAR control
Capacitor step 2 VAR control
Capacitor step 3 VAR control
Capacitor step 4 VAR control
External capacitor step control block
Manual capacitor step control
Automatic capacitor step control
S80
S81
S82
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Assignment of Logic Inputs by Application
S84 T81 T82 M87 M81 G87 G82 B80
T87
M88
G88
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
B83
C86
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Assignment
4
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
I104
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
147
Remote Modules
Selection Guide and Connection
Selection Guide
4
Four remote modules are proposed as options to enhance the Sepam base unit
functions:
b the number and type of remote modules compatible with the base unit depend on the
Sepam application
b the DSM303 remote advanced UMI module is only compatible with base units that
do not have integrated advanced UMIs
Sepam Series 20 Sepam Series 40 Sepam Series 80
S2x, B2x
MET1482 Temperature sensor module
See page 149
MSA141
Analog output module
See page 151
DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module
See page 152
MCS025
Synchro-check module
See page 154
Number of sets of interlinked modules / maximum number
of remote modules
T2x, M2x
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1 set of 3 interlinked
modules
S4x
T4x, M4x, G4x S8x, B8x
0
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
1 set of 3 interlinked
modules
T8x, G8x
M8x, C8x
0
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
5 modules split between 2 sets
of interlinked modules
Connection
CAUTION
Connection Cables
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be connected
with the special CCA785 cable that is supplied with
the module and equipped with an orange RJ45 plug
and a black RJ45 plug.
Different combinations of modules may be connected using cables fitted with two black
RJ45 connectors, which come in three lengths:
b CCA770: length = 2 ft (0.6 m)
b CCA772: length = 6.6 ft (2 m)
b CCA774: length = 13.1 ft (4 m)
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
equipment damage.
The modules are linked by cables which provide the power supply and act as functional links with
the Sepam unit (connector D to connector Da , Dd to Da , …).
Rules on Inter-Module Linking
DE51646
b Link three modules maximum
b DSM303 and MCS025 modules may only be connected at the end of the link
Maximum Advisable Configurations
Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40 with One set of Interlinked Modules
Cable
Module 1 Cable
Module 2
Cable
Module 3
DE51770
Base
Ia
Ib
Ic
Series 20
Series 40
Series 40
Series 40
CCA772
CCA772
CCA772
CCA772
MSA141
MSA141
MSA141
MET1482
CCA770
CCA770
CCA770
CCA770
MET1482
MET1482
MET1482
MET1482
CCA774
CCA774
CCA772
CCA774
DSM303
DSM303
MET1482
DSM303
Sepam Series 80 with Two sets of Interlinked Modules
Sepam Series 80 has 2 connection ports for remote modules, D1 and D2 .
Modules may be connected to either port.
Base
Set 1 D1
Cable
CCA772
Module 1
MET1482
Cable
CCA770
Module 2
MET1482
Cable
CCA774
Module 3
DSM303
DE51647
A RMS
Ia = 165 RMS
A
Ib = 166 RMS
A
Ic = 167
a
b
c
Example of inter-module linking on Sepam Series 20
148
Set 2 D2
CCA772
MSA141
CCA785
MCS025
-
-
-
-
MET1482 Temperature Sensor
Module
Remote Modules
PE50021
Function
The MET1482 module can be used to connect eight temperature sensors (RTDs)
of the same type:
b Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting
b 3-wire temperature sensors
b A single module for each Sepam Series 20 base unit, connected by a CCA770 (2 ft
or 0.6 m), CCA772 (6.6 ft or 2 m) or CCA774 (13.1 ft or 4 m) cable
b two modules for each Sepam Series 40 or Series 80 base units, connected by a
CCA770 (2 ft or 0.6 m), CCA772 (6.6 ft or 2 m) or CCA774 (13.1 ft or 4 m) cable
The temperature measurement as in a transformer or motor winding is used by the
following protection functions:
b Thermal overload (to account for ambient temperature)
b Temperature monitoring
MET1482 Temperature sensor module.
Characteristics
MET1482 Module
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0.441 lb (0.2 kg)
On symmetrical DIN rail
-13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Temperature Sensors
Pt100
Ni100 / Ni120
Isolation from ground
Current injected in RTD
None
4 mA
None
4 mA
DE80031
Description and Dimensions
A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4.
B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8.
in.
(mm)
3.46
(88)
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cable (according
to application).
Grounding/grounding terminal.
1
1.18(1)
(30)
5.67
(144)
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cable connected.
Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to:
b MET1: 1st MET1482 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8
(default position)
b MET2: 2nd MET1482 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16
(for Sepam Series 40 and Series 80 only).
149
4
Remote Modules
MET1482 Temperature Sensor
Module
Connection
4
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from all voltages.
DE51649
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Connecting the Grounding Terminal
Connecting the grounding terminal is accomplished by using a tinned copper braid
with cross-section u AWG 10 (6 mm²) or cable with cross-section u AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
and length y 7.9 in (200 mm), fitted with a 0.16 in (4 mm) ring lug. Check the tightness
(maximum tightening torque 19.5 lb-in or 2.2 Nm).
Connecting RTDs to Screw-Type Connectors
b 1 wire with cross-section AWG 24-12 (0.2 to 2.5 mm²)
Recommended cross-sections according to distance:
b Up to 330 ft (100 m)
≥ AWG 18 (1 mm²)
b Up to 990 ft (300 m)
≥ AWG 16 (1.5 mm²)
b Up to 0.62 mi (1 km)
≥ AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
Maximum distance between sensor and module: 0.62 mi (1 km).
Wiring Precautions
b Shielded cabling is preferred. Using unshielded cables can cause measurement
errors which vary according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance
b Only connect the shielding at the MET1482 end, in the shortest manner possible, to
the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B
b Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end
Accuracy derating according to wiring
The error Dt is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the
cable cross-section:
L ( km )
Δt ( °C ) = 2 × -------------------2--S (m m )
b ±2.1°C/km for 0.93 mm² cross-section (AWG 18)
b ±1°C/km for 1.92 mm² cross-section (AWG 14)
150
MSA141
Analog Output Module
Remote Modules
Function
Mt11009
The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal:
b selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting
b 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, or 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting
b scaling the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted
measurement.
Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with a
dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is:
v minimum value = 0
v maximum value = 3000
b a single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (2
ft or 0.6m), CCA772 (6.6 ft or 2m) or CCA774 (13.1 ft or 4m) cables.
The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.
MSA141 Analog Output Module
Characteristics
MSA141 Module
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0.441 lb (0.2 kg)
On symmetrical DIN rail
-13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Analog Output
DE80032
Current
Scaling
(no data input checking)
Load impedance
Accuracy
4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA
Minimum value
Maximum value
< 600 W (including wiring)
0.5 %
Available Measurements
Unit
Series 20
Series 40
Series 80
Phase and residual currents
Line-to-neutral and line-to-line
voltages
Frequency
Thermal capacity used
Temperatures
Active power
Reactive power
Apparent power
Power factor
Remote setting via communication
link
0.1 A
1V
b
b
b
b
b
b
0.01 Hz
1%
1 °C
0.1 kW
0.1 kvar
0.1 kVAR
0.01
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Description and Dimensions
in.
(mm)
3.46
(88)
A Terminal block for analog output.
Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable.
Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cable
(according to application).
Grounding terminal.
1
1.18(1)
(30)
5.67
(144)
Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
Connection
DE52182
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cable connected
Connecting the Grounding Terminal
Use a tinned copper braid with cross-section u AWG 10 (6 mm²) or cable with
cross-section u AWG 12 (2.5 mm²) and length y 7.9 in (200 mm), equipped with a
0.16 in (4 mm) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 19.5 lb-in
or 2.2 Nm).
Connection of Analog Output to Screw-Type Connector
b 1 wire with cross-section AWG 24-12 (0.2 to 2.5 mm²)
b or 2 wires with cross-section AWG 24-18 (0.2 to 1 mm²).
Wiring Precautions
b Shielded cables are preferred
b Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end
151
4
Remote Modules
Function
PE50127
4
DSM303
Remote Advanced UMI Module
When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine
interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated
advanced UMI. It can be installed on the front panel of a room in the most suitable
operating location:
b reduced depth < 1.2 in (30 mm)
b a single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 (6.6 ft or 2
m) or CCA774 (13.1 ft or 4 m) cables
The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.
Characteristics
DSM303 Module
DSM303 remote advanced UMI module.
152
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0.3 kg (0.661 lb)
Flush-mounted
-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Same characteristics as for Sepam base units
Remote Modules
DSM303
Remote Advanced UMI Module
Description and Dimensions
4
The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional
screw-type fastening is required.
Side view
DE80034
DE80033
Front view
in.
(mm)
4.61
(117)
5.98
(152)
in.
(mm)
16
17
3.78
(96)
0.98
(25)
0.59
(15)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Green LED: Sepam on.
Red LED:
- steadily on: module unavailable
- flashing: Sepam link unavailable.
9 yellow LEDs.
Label identifying the LEDs.
Graphic LCD screen.
Display of measurements.
Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data.
Display of alarm messages.
Sepam reset (or confirm data entry).
Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up).
LED test (or move cursor down).
Access to protection settings.
Access to Sepam parameters.
Entry of 2 passwords.
PC connection port.
Mounting clip.
Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness
(gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary).
Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with
a CCA77x cable.
DE80060
Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness < 3 mm or 0.12 in)
in.
(mm)
3.88 ±0.5
(98.5 ±0.5)
DE53033
5.67 ±0.2
(144 ±0.2)
Connection
Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cable.
The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically
ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc).
153
Remote Modules
Function
The MCS025 module checks the voltages upstream and downstream of a circuit
breaker to verify that the two voltages are in sync before the circuit breaker closes
(ANSI 25). It checks the differences in amplitude, frequency, and phase between the
two measured voltages, taking into account dead line/bus conditions.
PE50285
4
MCS025
Synchro-Check Module
Three relay outputs may be used to send the close enable command to several
Sepam Series 80 units.
The circuit-breaker control function of each Sepam Series 80 unit will take this close
enable into account.
The settings for the synchro-check function and the measurements carried out by the
module may be accessed by the SFT2841 setting and operating software, similar to
the other settings and measurements for the Sepam Series 80.
The MCS025 module is supplied ready for operation with:
b the CCA620 connector for connection of the relay outputs and the power supply
b the CCT640 connector for voltage connection
b the CCA785 cable for connection between the module and the Sepam Series 80
base unit
MCS025 synchro-check module.
Characteristics
MCS025 Module
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
2.98 lb (1.35 kg)
With the AMT840 accessory
-13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Voltage Inputs
Input impedance
Burden
Continuous thermal withstand
1-second overload
> 100 kW
< 0.015 VA (VT 100 V)
240 V
480 V
Relay Outputs
Relay Outputs O1 and O2
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Resistive load
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load L/R < 40 ms
Resistive load
Load pf > 0.3
Making capacity
Isolation of outputs from other
isolated groups
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
8A
8A/ 4A
6A/ 2A
4A/ 1A
8A
0.7 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
8A
0.3 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
100 to 240 V AC
8A
8A
5A
< 15 ms for 200 ms
Enhanced
Relay Outputs O3 and O4 (O4 not used)
Voltage
Continuous current
Breaking capacity
Isolation of outputs from other
isolated groups
DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Load L/R < 20 ms
Load pf > 0.3
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
2A
2A/ 1A
2A
0.5 A
2A
0.15 A
100 to 240 V AC
2A
5A
Enhanced
Power Supply
Voltage
24 to 250 V DC, -20 % / +10 %
Maximum consumption
Inrush current
Acceptable momentary outages
6W
< 10 A for 10 ms
10 ms
154
110 to 240 V AC, -20 % / + 0 %
47.5 to 63 Hz
9 VA
< 15 A for one half period
10 ms
Remote Modules
1
MCS025 module
MCS025
Synchro-Check Module
Description
4
b auxiliary power supply
b 4 relay outputs:
v O1, O2, O3: close enable.
v O4: not used
DE51654
A CCA620 20-pin connector for:
B CCT640 connector (line-to-neutral or phase-to-
phase) for the two input voltages to be
synchronized
C RJ45 connector, not used
D RJ45 connector for module connection to the
Sepam Series 80 base unit, either directly or via
another remote module.
2
Two mounting clips
3
Two holding pins for the flush-mount position
4
CCA785 connection cable
155
MCS025
Synchro-Check Module
Remote Modules
Dimensions
DE52816
4
in.
(mm)
1.57
(40)
DE80079
in.
(mm)
8.74
(222)
8.74
(222)
7.72
(196)
6.93
(176)
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
3.86
(98)
0.91
(23)
MCS025.
Assembly with AMT840 Mounting Plate
DE52759
0.26
(6.5)
in.
(mm)
The MCS025 module should be mounted at the back of the compartment using the
AMT840 mounting plate.
1.57
(40)
9.06
(230)
1.57
(40)
DE80081
1.57
(40)
7.95
(202)
in.
(mm)
4.84
(123)
1.57
(40)
6.38
(162)
1.57
(40)
8.50
(216)
9.29
(236)
0.39
(10)
0.59
(15)
AMT840 mounting plate.
Connection Characteristics
Connector
Type
Reference
Wiring
A
Screw-type
CCA620
B
Screw-type
CCT640
D
Orange RJ45 connector
b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm²
(> AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm²
(>AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 à 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fittings:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 x 1 mm² wires (AWG 18)
v wire length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
VT wiring: same as wiring of the CCA620
Grounding connection: by 4 mm (0.15 in) ring lug
CCA785, special prefabricated cable supplied with the MCS025
module:
b orange RJ45 connector for connection to port D on the
MCS025 module
b black RJ45 connector for connection to the Sepam Series 80
base unit, either directly or via another remote module.
156
MCS025
Synchro-Check Module
DE52075
Remote Modules
a
b
c
4
VT
VT
Sepam™ Series 80
I/O
Mod
(1) Line-to-line or line-to-neutral connection.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
The MCS025 module must ALWAYS be
connected with the special CCA785 cable,
supplied with the module and equipped with an
orange RJ45 plug and a black RJ45 plug.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
equipment damage.
! DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
157
Selection Guide
Communication
Accessories
There are two types of Sepam communication accessories:
b communication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the
communication network
b converters and other accessories, as options, which are used for complete
implementation of the communication network.
4
Communication-Interface Selection Guide
ACE9492
ACE959
ACE937
ACE969TP ACE969FO ACE850TP (4) ACE850FO (4)
S-LAN
or E-LAN (1)
S-LAN
or E-LAN (1)
S-LAN
or E-LAN (1)
S-LAN
E-LAN
S-LAN
E-LAN
S-LAN and
E-LAN
S-LAN and E-LAN
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Type of Network
Protocol
Modbus RTU
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
Modbus TCP/IP
IEC 61850
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
b
b
(3)
(3)
b
b
(3)
(3)
Physical Interface
RS485
Fiber optic ST
10/100 base T
100 base FX
2-wire
4-wire
Star
Ring
1 port
1 port
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
(2)
b
b
Power Supply
CC
CA
See details on page
Supplied by
Sepam
Supplied by
Sepam
Supplied by
Sepam
24 to 250 V
110 to 240 V
24 to 250 V
110 to 240 V
160
161
162
163
163
(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN.
(2) Except with the Modbus protocol.
(3) Not simultaneously (1 protocol per application).
(4) Soon available for Sepam Series 40 and series 80.
24 to 250 V
110 to 240 V
24 to 250 V
110 to 240 V
Converter Selection Guide
ACE9092
ACE919CA
ACE919CC
EGX100
EGX400
ECI850
Physical interface
1 port RS232
1 port
RS485 port 2-wire
1 port
RS485 port 2-wire
1 Ethernet port
10/100 base T
2 Ethernet ports
10/100 base T
100 base F
1 Ethernet port
10/100 base T
Modbus RTU
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
IEC 60870-5-103
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
DNP3
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
b
Converter
Modbus TCP/IP
b
IEC 61850
To Sepam
Physical interface
1 port
RS485 2-wire
1 port
RS485 2-wire
1 port
RS485 2-wire
1 port
RS485 2-wire or
4-wire
2 ports
RS485 2-wire or
4-wire
1 port
RS485 2-wire or
4-wire
Distributed power supply
RS485
Modbus RTU
b
b
b
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
IEC 60870-5-103
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
b
b
DNP3
b
(1)
b
(1)
b
(1)
24 to 48 V
24 V
24 V
100 to 240 V AC
(with adapter)
24 V
170
176
177
Power Supply
DC
AC
See details on page
110 to 220 V AC
11to à 220 V AC
168
170
(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as the Sepam protocol.
Note: All these interfaces accept the E-LAN protocol.
158
Communication Interfaces
Communication Interface
CCA612 Connection Cable
4
Plugging into Sepam
Cable used to connect a communication interface to a Sepam base unit:
b Length = 9.8 ft (3 m)
b Fitted with two green RJ45 plugs.
Sepam Series 80
DE51660
DE51659
Sepam Series 20 and Series 40
Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40: 1 communication port
Sepam Series 80: 2 communication ports.
Connecting to the Communication Network
RS485 Network Cable
RS485 medium
Distributed power supply
Shielding
Characteristic impedance
Gauge
Resistance per unit length
Capacitance between conductors
Capacitance between conductor and
shielding
Maximum length
2-wire
4-wire
1 shielded twisted pair
2 shielded twisted pairs
1 shielded twisted pair
1 shielded twisted pair
Tinned copper braid, coverage > 65%
120 W
AWG 24
< 62.1 W/mi (100 W/km)
< 18.3 pF/ft (60 pF/m)
< 30.5 pF/ft (100 pF/m)
4270 ft (1300 m)
Fiber Optic
Fiber type
Wavelength
Type of connector
Fiber Optic
Diameter
(μm)
50/125
62.5/125
100/140
200 (HCS)
Graded-index multimode silica
820 nm (invisible infrared)
ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Numerical
Aperture
(NA)
Maximum
Attenuation
(dBm/km)
Minimum Optical
Power Available
(dBm)
Maximum
Fiber Length
0.2
0.275
0.3
0.37
2.7
3.2
4
6
5.6
9.4
14.9
19.2
2300 ft (700 m)
5900 ft (1800 m)
9200 ft (2800 m)
8500 ft (2600 m)
159
Communication Interfaces
Function
PE50029
The ACE9492 interface performs two functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS485 communication
network
b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with
a CCA612 cable.
Characteristics
ACE9492 Module
ACE9492 2-wire RS485 network connection interface
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
On symmetrical DIN rail
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
2-wire RS485 Electrical Interface
Standard
Distributed power supply
Power consumption
EIA 2-wire RS485 differential
External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
DE80035
Maximum Length of 2-wire RS485 Network
with Standard Cable
Number of
Sepam Units
in.
(mm)
3.46
(88)
5
10
20
25
Maximum Length with
12 V DC Power Supply
Maximum Length with
24 V DC Power Supply
1000 ft (320 m)
590 ft (180 m)
520 ft (160 m)
410 ft (125 m)
3300 ft
2500 ft
1500 ft
1200 ft
(1000 m)
(750 m)
(450 m)
(375 m)
Description and Dimensions
A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable
1.18(1)
(30)
t Grounding terminal
2.83
(72)
(1) 2.8 in (70 mm) with CCA612 cable connected
DE80127
4
ACE9492
2-wire RS485 Network Interface
2-wire
RS485
network
Power supply
or
24 V DC
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress).
2 Jumper for RS485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 W), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 0.24 in or 6 mm).
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the grounding terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section ≥ AWG 10 (6 mm²) or cable with cross-section ≥ AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
and length ≤ 7.9 in (200 mm), fitted with a 0.16 in (4 mm) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 19.5 lb-in (2.2 Nm).
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cable (length = 9.8 ft or 3 m, green fittings)
b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2-wire
RS485
network
Power supply
or
24 V DC
Note: The shield connection should be grounded at only one end
of the serial daisy chain.
160
Communication Interfaces
ACE959
4-wire RS485 Network Interface
Function
PE50023
The ACE959 interface performs two functions:
b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS485 communication network
b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
cable.
Characteristics
ACE959 Module
ACE959 4-wire RS485 network connection interface.
Weight
0.441 lb (0.2 kg)
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
On symmetrical DIN rail
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
4-wire RS485 Electrical Interface
in.
(mm)
DE80036
3.46
(88)
Standard
Distributed power supply
Power consumption
EIA 4-wire RS485 differential
External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum Length of 4-wire RS485 Network
with Standard Cable
Number of
Sepam units
1.18(1)
(30)
5.67
(144)
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cable connected
5
10
20
25
Maximum length with
12 V DC power supply
Maximum length with
24 V DC power supply
1000 ft (320 m)
590 ft (180 m)
520 ft (160 m)
410 ft (125 m)
3300 ft
2500 ft
1500 ft
1200 ft
(1000 m)
(750 m)
(450 m)
(375 m)
Description and Dimensions
A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
-wire
RS485
networks
Power supply
or
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable
D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
DE80129
t Grounding terminal
Power supply
or
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress).
2 Jumper for 4-wire RS485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 W), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 0.24 in or 6 mm).
Connection
networks
RS485
-wire
Power supply
or
(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in
the shielded cable (3 pairs).
(2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power
supply module.
Note: The shield connection should be grounded at only one
end of the serial daisy chain.
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b Connection of the grounding terminal by tinned copper braid with
cross-section ≥ AWG 10 (6 mm²) or cable with cross-section ≥ AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
and length ≤ 7.9 in (200 mm), fitted with a 0.16 in (4 mm) ring lug.
Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 19.5 lB-in or 2.2 Nm).
b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding
at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cable (length = 9.8 ft or 3 m, green fittings)
b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC
b The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not included
in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed power
supply module.
161
4
Communication Interfaces
Function
PE50024
The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication wye
system. This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cable.
Characteristics
ACE937 Module
ACE937 fiber optic connection interface.
Weight
Assembly
Power supply
0.22 lb (0.1 kg)
On symmetrical DIN rail
Supplied by Sepam
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Fiber Optic Interface
Fiber type
Wavelength
Type of connector
Fiber Optic
Diameter
(μm)
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic.
DE80037
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
serious injury.
50/125
62.5/125
100/140
200 (HCS)
Graded-index multimode silica
820 nm (invisible infrared)
ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Numerical
Aperture
(NA)
Maximum
Attenuation
(dBm/km)
Minimum Optical
Power Available
(dBm)
Maximum
Fiber Length
0.2
0.275
0.3
0.37
2.7
3.2
4
6
5.6
9.4
14.9
19.2
2300 ft (700 m)
5900 ft (1800 m)
9200 ft (2800 m)
8500 ft (2600 m)
Maximum length calculated with:
b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in two ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard)
Example for a 62.5/125 μm Fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)
in.
(mm)
Description and Dimensions
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cable.
3.46
(88)
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active
(sending or receiving in progress).
2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving).
3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).
1.18(1)
(30)
2.83
(72)
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cable connected.
Connection
b The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors
b Fiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors
The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cable (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, green fittings).
DE51666
4
ACE937
Fiber Optic Interface
162
Communication Interfaces
ACE969TP and ACE969FO
Interfaces Network
PE50470
Function
ACE969TP communication interface
The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam Series 20,
Series 40, and Series 80. They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to
two independent communication networks:
b The S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a
communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following
protocols:
v IEC 60870-5-103
v DNP3
v Modbus RTU
The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting.
b The E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote
parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software
PE50471
There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces that are identical except for the
S-LAN port:
b ACE969TP (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire
RS485 serial link
b ACE969FO (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic
connection (wye or ring)
The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS485 type port.
ACE969FO communication interface
163
4
Communication Interfaces
ACE969TP and ACE969FO
Interfaces Network
Characteristics
4
ACE969 Module
Technical Characteristics
Weight
Assembly
Operating temperature
Environmental characteristics
0.628 lb (0.285 kg)
On symmetrical DIN rail
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Power Supply
Voltage
Range
Maximum consumption
Inrush current
Acceptable ripple content
Acceptable momentary outages
24 to 250 V DC
-20%/+10%
2W
< 10 A 100 ms
12%
20 ms
110 to 240 V AC
-20%/+10%
3 VA
2-wire RS485 Communication Ports
Electrical Interface
Standard
Distributed power supply
Power consumption
Max. number of Sepam units
EIA 2-wire RS485 differential
External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA in sending mode
25
Maximum Length of 2-wire RS485 Network
Number of Sepam Units
5
10
20
25
With Distributed Power Supply
12 V DC
24 V DC
1000 ft (320 m)
590 ft (180 m)
430 ft (130 m)
410 ft (125 m)
3300 ft (1000 m)
2500 ft (750 m)
1500 ft (450 m)
1200 ft (375 m)
Fiber Optic Communication Port
Fiber Optic Interface
Fiber type
Wavelength
Type of connector
Graded-index multimode silica
820 nm (invisible infrared)
ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Maximum Length of Fiber Optic Network
Fiber Diameter
(μm)
50/125
62.5/125
100/140
200 (HCS)
Numerical
Aperture
(NA)
Attenuation
(dBm/km)
Minimum Optical
Power Available
(dBm)
Maximum Fiber
Length
0.2
0.275
0.3
0.37
2.7
3.2
4
6
5.6
9.4
14.9
19.2
2300 ft (700 m)
5900 ft (1800 m)
9200 ft (2800 m)
8500 ft (2600 m)
Maximum length calculated with:
b Minimum optical power available
b Maximum fiber attenuation
b Losses in two ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 μm Fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi).
Dimensions
DE80043
in.
(mm)
3.54
(90)
5.67
(144)
164
2.05
(52)
Communication Interfaces
ACE969TP and ACE969FO
Interfaces Network
Description
ACE969 Communication Interfaces
4
ACE969FO
5
4
6
DE51856
DE51855
3
Rx
Rx
Tx
N
S-LA
Tx
on
N
E-LA B
A
V+ V-
O
969F
ACE
2
1
9
7
2-wire RS485 Communication Ports
Port E-LAN (ACE969TP or ACE969FO)
DE51864
Port S-LAN (ACE969TP)
serv
1 2-wire RS485 network terminal block:
b 2 black terminals: connection of RS485 twisted-pair
(2 wires)
b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted-pair for
distributed power supply
2 Indication LEDs:
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving.
3 Clamps and recovery of shielding for two network
cables, incoming and outgoing (inner diameter of
clamp = 0.236 in or 6 mm)
4 Fixing stud for network cable ties
5 Jumper for RS485 network line-end impedance
matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 W), to be set to:
b Rc, if the interface is not at the line end (default
position)
b Rc, if the interface is at the line end.
ACE969TP
DE51863
1 Grounding/grounding terminal using supplied braid
2 Power-supply terminal block
3 RJ45 connector to connect the interface to the base
unit with a CCA612 cable
4 Green LED: ACE969 energized
5 Red LED: ACE969 interface status
b LED off = ACE969 set up and communication
operational
b LED flashing = ACE969 not set up or setup incorrect
b LED remains on = ACE969 has faulted
6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades
7 E-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port
(ACE969TP and ACE969FO)
8 S-LAN 2-wire RS485 communication port
(ACE969TP)
9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port (ACE969FO).
Rx
Tx
on
S-LAN
V+ V- A B
Rx
Tx
Rx
E-LAN
V+ V - A B
Rc
Rc
Rc
Rc
Fiber-Optic Communication Port
serv
Port S-LAN (ACE969FO)
DE51865
1 Indication LEDs:
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending
b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving.
2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving)
3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending).
Rx
Tx
on
S-LAN
Rx
Tx
E-LAN
V+ V - A B
Rc
Rc
Tx
Rx
165
ACE969TP and ACE969FO
Interfaces Network
Connection
Communication Interfaces
Power Supply and Sepam
4
b The ACE969 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using
a CCA612 cable (length = 9.84 ft or 3 m, green RJ45 fittings)
b The ACE969 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 230 V AC.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective ground and to the functional
ground.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Terminals
DE51845 DE51962
DE51727
e1-e2 - supply
166
Protective ground
Functional ground
Type
Wiring
Screw
terminals
Screw
terminal
b Wiring with no fittings:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to
2.5mm² (≥ AWG 24-12)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to
1 mm² (≥ AWG 24-18)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in)
b Wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique
fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18)
v wire length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
1 green/yellow wire, max. length 9.8 ft (3 m)
and max. cross-section AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
0.16 in (4 mm)
ring lug
Grounding braid, supplied for connection to
cubicle grounding
Communication Interfaces
Control Power
DE52078
AC/DC +
AC/DC –
Not Connected
DE52165
Shield
(Typical)
ACE969TP
Common
Ground
Chassis
Common
Ground
ACE969TP and ACE969FO
Interfaces Network
Connection
2-wire RS485 Communication Ports
(S-LAN or E-LAN)
4
b Connection of RS485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to black terminals A and B
b Connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to green terminals V+ and Vb The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding
at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding must be around and in contact with the clamp
v shielding continuity of incoming and outgoing cables is ensured by the electrical
continuity of the clamps
b All cable clamps are linked by an internal connection to the grounding terminals of
the ACE969 interface (protective and functional grounding), that is, the shielding of
the RS485 cables is grounded as well
b On the ACE969TP interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN
RS485 networks are grounded
Note: The shield connection should be grounded at only one end of the serial daisy chain.
Fiber Optic Communication Port
(S-LAN)
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING
Never look directly into the fiber optic.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause serious injury.
The fiber optic connection can be made:
b point-to-point to an optic wye system
b in a ring system (active echo)
The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type
connectors.
The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
167
ACE9092
RS232/RS485 Converter
Converters
The ACE9092 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped with
a V24/RS232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire
RS485 network.
PE50035
4
Function
After the parameters are set, the ACE9092 converter performs conversion and network
polarization. It also automatically dispatches frames between the master and the
stations by two-way simplex (half-duplex, single-pair) transmission. This is all done
without requiring any flow control signals.
The ACE9092 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the
distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE9492, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces.
The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor
communication settings.
ACE9092 RS232/RS485 converter.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION
OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this
equipment. Such work should be performed
only after reading this entire set of instructions
and checking the technical characteristics of
the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the protective
ground and to the functional ground.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.
Characteristics
Mechanical Characteristics
Weight
Assembly
0.617 lb (0.280 kg)
On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
Electrical Characteristics
Power supply
Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply
and frame, and between ACE power supply
and interface supply
Galvanic isolation
between RS232 and RS485 interfaces
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm
(0.2 in x 0.79 in)
110 to 220 V AC ± 10%, 47 to 63 Hz
2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
1 A rating
Communication and Sepam Interface Distributed Supply
Data format
Transmission delay
Distributed power supply for Sepam
interfaces
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with
distributed supply
11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
< 100 ns
12 V DC or 24 V DC
12
Environmental Characteristics
Operating temperature
Electromagnetic
Compatibility
168
+23°F to +131°F (-5°C to +55°C)
IEC
standard
Value
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns
60255-22-4
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
60255-22-1
1.2/50 μs pulse waves
60255-5
4 kV with capacitive tie
breaker in common mode
2 kV with direct tie
breaker in common mode
1 kV with direct tie
breaker in differential
mode
1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential mode
3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode
ACE9092
RS232/RS485 Converter
DE80038
Converters
Description and Dimensions
in.
(mm)
4
A Terminal block for RS232 link limited to 33 ft (10 m).
B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power-supply terminal block
3.35
(85) 4.13
(105)
1.77
(45)
2.56
(65)
DE80022
4.13
(105)
in.
(mm)
Function
1.75
(44.5)
2.22
(56.4)
1.42
(36)
0.63
(16)
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE9092.
DE51668
1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 LEDs:
b ON/OFF: on if ACE9092 is energized
b Tx: on if RS232 sending by ACE9092 is active
b Rx: on if RS232 receiving by ACE9092 is active.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS485 network polarization and
line impedance matching resistors.
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W
2-wire RS485 network impedance
matching by 150 W resistor
SW1/1
SW1/2
SW1/3
ON
ON
ON
5 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format
(same parameters as for RS232 link and 2-wire RS485 network).
Rate (baud)
SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
Format
With parity check
Without parity check
1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam)
2 stop bits
SW2/4
SW2/5
0
1
0
1
Converter Configuration when Delivered
b 12 V DC distributed power supply
b 11-bit format, with parity check
b 2-wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
Connection
RS232 Link
b
b
b
b
To AWG 12 (2.5 mm²) screw-type terminal block A
Maximum length 33 ft (10 m)
Rx/Tx: RS232 receiving/sending by ACE9092
0V: Rx/Tx common, do not ground.
2-wire RS485 Link with Distributed Power Supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
b 2-wire RS485 signals: L+, Lb Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power Supply
b To AWG 12 (2.5 mm²) screw-type terminal block C
b Reversible phase and neutral
b Grounded via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
169
Converters
Function
The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped with
an RS485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a
2-wire RS485 network.
PE50036
4
ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS485/RS485 Converters
The ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching
without requiring any flow control signals.
The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed
power supply of the Sepam ACE9492, ACE959 or ACE969 interfaces.
There are two types of ACE919 converter:
b ACE919CC, DC-powered
b ACE919CA, AC-powered.
ACE919CC RS485/RS485 converter.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this
equipment. Such work should be performed
only after reading this entire set of instructions
and checking the technical characteristics of
the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Start by connecting the device to the
protective ground and to the functional
ground.
b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in
use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.
Characteristics
Mechanical Characteristics
Weight
Assembly
Electrical Characteristics
Power supply
Protection by time-delayed fuse 0.2 in x 0.79 in
(5 mm x 20 mm)
Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply
and frame, and between ACE power supply
and interface supply
0.617 lb (0.280 kg)
On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
ACE919CA
ACE919CC
110 to 220 V AC
±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
1 A rating
24 to 48 V DC ±20%
2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,
1 min
Communication and Sepam Interface Distributed Supply
Data format
Transmission delay
Distributed power supply for Sepam
interfaces
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with
distributed supply
11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
< 100 ns
12 V DC or 24 V DC
12
Environmental Characteristics
Operating temperature
+23°F to +131°F (-5°C to +55°C)
Electromagnetic Compatibility IEC standard
170
1 A rating
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns
60255-22-4
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
60255-22-1
1.2/50 μs pulse waves
60255-5
Value
4 kV with capacitive
tie breaker
in common mode
2 kV with direct tie
breaker
in common mode
1 kV with direct
tie breaker in
differential mode
1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential
mode
3 kV common mode
1 kV differential
mode
ACE919CA and ACE919CC
RS485/RS485 Converters
Converters
DE80039
Description and Dimensions
in.
(mm)
3.35
(85) 4.13
(105)
1.77
(45)
4.13
(105)
1
2
3
4
2.56
(65)
Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
ON/OFF LED: ON if ACE919 is energized.
SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS485 network polarization and
line impedance matching resistors.
DE80022
Function
in.
(mm)
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 W
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 W
2-wire RS485 network impedance
matching by 150 W resistor
1.75
(44.5)
2.22
(56.4)
4
A Terminal block for 2-wire RS485 link without distributed power supply.
B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.
1.42
(36)
SW1/1
SW1/2
SW1/3
ON
ON
ON
Converter Configuration when Delivered
b 12 V DC distributed power supply
b 2-wire RS485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
0.63
(16)
Connection
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919
2-wire RS485 Link without Distributed Power Supply
b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw-type terminal block A
b L+, L-: 2-wire RS485 signals
DE51670
b
Shielding.
2-wire RS485 Link with Distributed Power Supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
b 2-wire RS485 signals: L+, Lb Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply
b To AWG 12 (2.5 mm²) screw-type terminal block C
b Reversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA)
b Grounded via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
171
Converters
Function
PE80033-36
4
Sepam ECI850 Server
for IEC 61850
The ECI850 connects Sepam Series 20, Series 40, and Series 80 units to an Ethernet
network using the IEC 61850 protocol. It acts as the interface between the Ethernet/
IEC 61850 network and a Sepam RS485/Modbus network.
Two PRI surge arresters (catalog number 16595) are supplied with the ECI850 to
protect its power supply.
Characteristics
ECI850 Module
Technical Characteristics
Sepam ECI850 server for IEC 61850.
Weight
0,37 lb (0.17 kg)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
Power Supply
Voltage
24 V DC (±10 %) supplied by a class 2 supply
Maximum consumption
4W
Dielectric strength
1.5 kV
Environmental Characteristics
Operating temperature
-13 °F to +158 °F (-25 °C to +70 °C)
Storage temperature
-40 °F to +185 °F (-40 °C to +85 °C)
Relative humidity
5 to 95 % (without condensation)
at 131 °F (+55 °C)
Pollution degree
Class 2
Degree of protection
IP30
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Emission Tests
Emission (radiated and conducted)
EN 55022/EN 55011/FCC Class A
Immunity Tests – Radiated Disturbances
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Radiated radio-frequency fields
EN 61000-4-3
Magnetic fields at power frequency
EN 61000-4-8
Immunity Tests – Conducted Disturbances
Fast transient bursts
EN 61000-4-4
Surges
EN 61000-4-5
Conducted disturbances, induced by radiofrequency fields
EN 61000-4-6
Standards
International
IEC 60950
United States
UL 508/UL 60950
Canada
cUL (in compliance with CSA C22.2, no. 60950)
Australia / New Zealand
AS/NZS 60950
Certification
Europe
e
2-wire/4-wire RS485 Communication Ports
Electrical interface
Standard
EIA 2-wire/4-wire RS485 differential
Max. number of Sepam units
8
Maximum Length of 2-wire/4-wire RS485 Network
Number of Sepam Units
5
Maximum Length
3300 ft (1000 m)
8
2500 ft (750 m)
Ethernet Communication Port
172
Number of ports
1
Type of port
10/100 Base Tx
Protocols
HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850
TCP/IP
Transmission rate
10/100 Mbits/s
Sepam ECI850 Server
for IEC 61850
Converters
Characteristics
4
PRI Surge Arrester
Electrical Characteristics
Utilisation voltage
12 to 48 V
Full discharge current
10 kA (8/20 μs wave)
Rated discharge current
5 kA (8/20 μs wave)
Level of protection
70 V
Response time
< 25 ms
Mechanical Operation Indicator
White
Normal operation
Red
Arrester must be replaced
Connection
Tunnel terminals
Wires with maximum cross-section of AWG 24-12
(0.5 to 2.5 mm²)
1
/
LED: Power on and maintenance
2 Serial-link LEDs:
b RS485 LED: link to network activated
v On: RS485 mode
v Off: RS232 mode
v flashing TX LED: ECI850 sending
v flashing RX LED: ECI850 receiving
3 Ethernet LEDs:
b green LK LED on: link to network activated
b flashing green Tx LED: ECI850 sending
b flashing green Rx LED: ECI850 receiving
b green 100 LED:
b On: transmission rate = 100 Mbit/s
b Off: transmission rate = 10 Mbit/s
4 10/100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection via
RJ45 connector
5 24 V DC connection
6 Reset button
7 RS485 connector
8 RS485 setup switches
9 RS232 connector
PE80063
Description
RS485 Network Setup
DE53201
The RS485 setup switches are used to select the network-polarization (bias) and
line-impedance matching resistors and the type of RS485 network (2-wire/4-wire). The
default settings are for a 2-wire RS485 with network-polarization and line-impedance
matching resistors.
Recommended settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
2 wires (default)
Line-Impedance Matching
using Resistors
SW1
SW2
2-wire RS485
OFF
ON
4-wire RS485
ON
ON
SW1
SW2
Polarization (bias)
at 0 V
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
ON
at 5 V
RS485 Network Type
1
2
3
4
4 wires
RS485 network setup
5
6
ON
SW5
SW6
2-wire
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
ON
ON
4-wire
OFF
OFF
Ethernet Link Set-up
The TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the ECI850 to set
up the Ethernet link.
173
Sepam ECI850 Server
for IEC 61850
Converters
Dimensions
DE80153
4
2.59
(65.8)
in.
(mm)
2.28
(57.9) 3.18
(80.8) 3.57
(90.7)
1.38
(35)
1.78
(45.2)
2.83
(72)
2.69
(68.3)
Connection
CAUTION
0.10
(2.5)
1.95
(49.5)
b Connect the supply and the RS485 twisted pair using the ≤ 2.5 mm² cable
(≥ AWG 12).
b Connect the 24 V DC supply and ground to inputs 1, 5 and 3 on the PRI surge
arresters supplied with the ECI850.
b Connect outputs 2 and 6 of PRI surge arresters (catalog number 16595) to the - and
+ terminals on the terminal block with black screws.
b Connect the RS485 twisted pair (2 or 4 wires) to the terminals (RX+ RX- or RX+ RXTX+ TX-) on the terminal block with black screws.
b Connect the shielding of the RS485 twisted pair to the
terminal on the terminal
block with black screws.
b Connect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector.
HAZARD OF HIGH VOLTAGE SURGE DAMAGE
b Connect the two PRI surge arresters as indicated
in the diagrams below.
b Check the quality of the grounding conductors
connected to the surge arresters.
The equipment may be damaged if these
instructions are not followed.
DE80156
2-Wire RS485 Network
+
+24 V (1)(3)(5)
(1)(3)(5)
PRI
PRI
(2) (6)
(2) (6)
ECI850
ACE9492
(7) V+
(6) V-
V+
V-
Rx+ (3)
Rx- (4)
ACE9492
A
V+
V-
L+
L-
L+
L-
(5)
A
B
B
A
DE80157
4-Wire RS485 Network
+
+24 V (1)(3)(5)
(1)(3)(5)
PRI
PRI
(2) (6)
(2) (6)
ACE959
ECI850
(7) V+
(6) VRx+ (3)
Rx- (4)
Tx+ (1)
Tx- (2)
(5)
174
A
ACE959
V+
V-
V+
V-
Tx+
Tx-
Tx+
Tx-
Rx+
Rx-
B
A
Rx+
Rx-
B
Sepam ECI850 Server
for IEC 61850
Converters
Architecture Example
4
DE53202
The diagram below shows an example of a communication architecture using the
ECI850.
Supervisor
or RTU
Ethernet TCP/IP/IEC 61850
ECI850
S-LAN and
E-LAN
Rc
Up to 8 Sepam units
RS 485/Modbus
ACE9492
Sepam™
Series 20
Rc
Sepam™
Series 40
ACE9492
Rc
ACE9492
Sepam™
Series 80
Note: Rc = line-impedance matching resistor.
175
Converters
Function
E90463
The EGX100 serves as an Ethernet gateway for PowerLogic® System devices and for
any other communicating devices utilizing the Modbus protocol.
The EGX100 gateway offers complete access to status and measurement information
provided by the connected devices, for example, via the System ManagerTM Software
(SMS) installed on a PC.
PB101556
Architecture
DE52790
4
Ethernet EGX100 Gateway
EGX100 Gateway
PM700 Micrologic PM800
Power Trip Unit Power
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Sepam™
Series 80
Setup
Setup via an Ethernet Network
Once connected to an Ethernet network, the EGX100 gateway can be accessed by a
standard internet browser via its IP address to:
b specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway
b configure the serial port parameters (baud rate, parity, protocol, mode, physical
interface, and timeout value)
b create user accounts
b create or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus communication
parameters
b configure IP filtering to control access to serial devices
b access Ethernet and serial port diagnostic data
b update the firmware
Setup via a Serial Connection
Serial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX100 via an RS232 link. This
setup:
b specifies the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the EGX gateway
b specifies the language used for the setup session
176
Converters
Ethernet EGX400 Server
PE50538
Function
The EGX400 server is used as an Ethernet coupler for Sepam relays, PowerLogic®
devices, and any other communicating devices operating under the Modbus RS485
protocol. The EGX400 contains HTML pages (set up using the WPG software tool)
that can be accessed using a standard internet browser. The HTML pages are used to
display the information provided by the devices connected to the server.
PE50270
Supervisor and Internet Browser
The EGX400 server makes it possible to implement two types of user interface:
b supervision software
b a standard internet browser providing access to the main information organized in
predefined HTML pages
These two approaches, supervisor and internet browser, are complementary:
b the supervisor offers complete access to all information, but requires specific
software
b the HTML pages offer partial access to the main information via any PC connected
to the network
Ethernet EGX400 gateway
DE52081
Architecture
Sepam™ Series 80
Sepam™
Series 20
Sepam™
Series 40
Setup
Initial Setup
The initial setup is carried out using a PC connected to the EGX400 via an RS232 link.
This setup:
b specifies the IP address of the EGX gateway
b selects the type of Ethernet port (wire or optic fiber)
b lists the connected products with their Modbus communication parameters
Setup via the Ethernet Network
Once connected to the Ethernet network, the EGX400 server can be accessed by a
standard internet browser via its IP address to:
b create or update the list of the connected products with their Modbus
communication parameters
b update the firmware
177
4
Converters
EGX100
DB109282
4
Ethernet EGX100 Gateway
Ethernet EGX400 Server
Characteristics
EGX100
EGX400
Weight
Dimensions (H x W x D)
6 oz (170 g)
2.58 x 2.83 x 2.68 in
(91 x 72 x 68 mm)
24.7 oz (700 g)
0.98 x 7.48 x 4.53 in.
(25 x 190 x 115 mm)
Mounting
DIN rail
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)
Power supply
Class 3
24 V DC if not using PoE
Operating temperature
-13 °F to 158 °F
(-25 °C to +70°C)
Symmetrical or asymmetrical
DIN rail
Front or side position
None
24 V DC
100-240 V AC/24 V DC
adapter supplied
-22 °F to 176 °F
-30 °C to +80°C
Humidity rating
5 % to 95 % relative humidity
(without condensation) at
131 °F (+55 °C)
5 % to 95 % relative humidity
(without condensation) at
104 °F (+40 °C)
Regulatory/Standards Compliance for Electromagnetic Interference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24 Vbc power connection.
10/100 Base TX (802.3af) port for connection to Ethernet
via an RJ45 connector.
Ethernet and serial indication LEDs.
Power/Status LED.
Reset button.
RS485 connection.
Dip switches for biasing, termination, and 2-wire/4-wire
jumpers.
RS232 connection.
EGX400
Emissions (radiated and
conducted)
Immunity for industrial
environments:
- electrostatic discharge
- radiated RF
- electrical fast transients
- surge
- conducted RF
- power frequency magnetic
field
EN 55022/EN 55011/
FCC class A
EN 61000-6-2
EN 55022/FCC class A
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-6-2
Regulatory/Standards Compliance for Safety
International (CB scheme)
USA
Canada
Europe
Australia/New Zealand
IEC 60950
UL508/UL60950
cUL (complies with CSA
C22.2, no. 60950)
EN 60950
AS/NZS25 60950
UL508
cUL (complies with CSA
C22.2, no. 14-M91)
Serial Ports
1
RS232 or RS485 (2-wire or
4-wire), depending on settings
Protocol
Modbus RTU/ASCII
PowerLogic® (SY/MAX)
38400 or 57600 baud
depending on settings
32
DB100978
Number of ports
Types of ports
1
2
3
Power connector.
Ethernet indication LEDs.
10/100 Base TX port for connection to Ethernet via an
RJ45 connector.
4 100 Base FX port for connection to Ethernet via fiber optic
cable (LC connector).
5 COM1: terminal block for RS485 serial link.
6 COM1 indication LEDs.
7 COM2: terminal block for RS485 serial link.
8 COM2 indication LEDs.
9 Dip-switches for setup of COM1 and COM2 ports bias and
termination.
10 COM2: Sub D-9 connector for the RS232 serial link.
Maximum baud rate
Maximum number of directly
connected devices
2
COM1: RS485 (2-wire or
4-wire)
COM2: RS232 or RS485
(2-wire or 4-wire), depending
on settings
Modbus RTU/ASCII
PowerLogic® (SY/MAX)
38400 baud
32 per port, 64 in all
Ethernet Port
Number of ports
Types of ports
1
One 10/100 base TX
(802.3af) port
Protocol
HTTP, SNMP, FTP,
Modbus TCP/IP
10/100 MB
2
One 10/100 base TX port
One 100 base FX port
(multimode optic fiber)
HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, SNTP,
FTP, Modbus TCP/IP
10/100 MB
None
16 MB
Baud rate
Web Server
Memory for custom HTML
pages
178
Ethernet EGX100 Gateway
Ethernet EGX400 Server
in.
(mm)
DE52766
DE52765
Installation
DIN Rail Mounting (EGX100)
2.26
(57.29)
1.38
(35)
3.18
(80.8) 3.57
(90.7)
in.
(mm)
4
2.59
(65.8)
1.78
(45.2)
2.83
(72)
1.95
(49.5)
2.69
(68.3)
0.10
(2.5)
in.
(mm)
DE52768
DE52767
Side Mounting on DIN Rail (EGX400)
in.
(mm)
4.84
(123)
2.36
(60)
1.38
(35)
1.10
(28)
0.59
(15)
7.91
(201)
8.70
(221)
Front Mounting on DIN Rail (EGX400)
DE52770
in.
(mm)
DE52769
Converters
in.
(mm)
7.91
(201)
1.38
(35)
3.94
(100)
1.10
(28)
1.93
(49)
0.43
(11)
0.59
(15)
4.84
(123)
179
Converters
Function
PE50271
Easy to use, the WPG software tool generates HTML pages for the EGX400 server. It
is used to:
b select the devices connected to the server
b transfer the HTML pages corresponding to the selected devices to the server.
The WPG tool can set up HTML pages for the following devices:
b Sepam Series 20, Sepam Series 40, Sepam Series 80
b Masterpact™ equipped with Micrologic A, P and H control units
b Power Meter PM700 and PM800
b Circuit Monitor Series 2000, 3000 and 4000
The WPG software is available in English, French, and Spanish. To obtain WPG,
contact your Schneider Electric representative.
PE50272
HTML page with summary information on all the equipment in
a switchboard.
Single device operating information HTML page.
PE50273
4
WPG Software Tool
HTML Page Generator
Single device HTML page showing historical data.
180
HTML Pages
Following transfer, the EGX400 contains HTML pages that can be used to remotely
monitor equipment under secure conditions.
b 1st service level based on the summary pages.
b 2nd service level based on specific pages for each type of device.
Summary Pages
Five summary pages are available for overall monitoring of the switchboard.
They present the main measurements input by the devices connected to the server.
b Page 1
v 3-phase average rms current
v active power
v power factor
v circuit-breaker position
b Page 2
v rms current per phase
b Page 3
v demand current per phase
b Page 4
v demand power
v maximum power
v time-stamping data
b Page 5
v active power
v reactive power
v date and time of last reset of energy meters
Specific Pages for each Device
A number of specific pages present detailed information on each device for in-depth
analysis, such as:
b operating information:
v instantaneous current per phase
v demand current per phase
v active and reactive power
v average voltage (line-to-neutral and line-to-line)
v maximum unbalance
v power factor
v frequency
b event information:
v minimum and maximum current values
v maximum demand current
v date and time of last reset
b historical data:
v recording over 38 days of three user-selectable parameters (energy by default),
every 15, 30 or 60 minutes, with graphic display and data export to an Excel file
Sensors
Selection Guide
Phase Current Sensors
4
Two types of sensor may be used with Sepam to measure phase current:
b 1 A or 5 A current transformers
b LPCT (Low Power Current Transducer) type current sensors
Selection Guide
1 A or 5 A current sensors are:
b sized case by case: accuracy, electrical characteristics, etc.
b defined according to the IEC 60044-1 standard
The LPCT type current sensors are:
b simple sizing: a given LPCT sensor is suitable for measuring different rated
currents: for example, the CLP1 sensor measures rated currents of 25 to
1250 A
b defined according to IEC 60044-8 standard (rated secondary voltage = 22.5 mV)
Residual Current Sensors
The residual current value can be obtained from different sensors and assemblies
chosen according to the performance required (measurement accuracy and ground
fault protection sensitivity). Residual current can be:
b measured by a specific CSH120 or CSH200 zero sequence CT
b measured by a zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 ≤ n ≤1500), with an ACE990
adapter.
b calculated by Sepam from the vector sum of the three phase currents
Selection Guide
Measurement Sensors
Recommended Minimum Set Point
CSH120 or CSH200
Zero Sequence CT connected to
CCA634
> 1A
1 or 3 x 1 A or 5 A CT+ CSH30
0.10 INCT (DT)
0.05 INCT (IDMT)
Zero Sequence CT + ACE990
0.10 INCT (DT)
0.05 INCT (IDMT)
3-Phase CT
(Ir calculated by Sepam)
0.30 INCT (DT) (1)
0.10 INCT (IDMT) (1)
(1) Recommended minimum set point for ANSI 50N/51N function with H2 restraint:
0.10 INCT (DT) or 0.05 INCT (IDMT).
It is recommended not to set the ground fault protection functions below the
recommended minimum set point. This avoids any risk of unwanted tripping caused
by oversensitive detection of residual current or false residual current due to CT
saturation. Lower settings may be used to trigger alarms.
181
Sensors
Function
Sepam can be connected to any standard voltage transformer with a rated secondary
voltage of 100 V to 220 V. Schneider Electric offers a range of voltage transformers:
b to measure line-to-neutral voltages: voltage transformers with one insulated MV
terminal
b to measure line-to-line voltages: voltage transformers with two insulated MV
terminals
b with or without integrated protection fuses
058734NSD
4
Voltage Transformers
ANSI voltage transformer.
Consult us for more information.
Connection
The voltage transformers connect to Sepam:
b directly, for Sepam Series 40 and Series 80
b or via the CCT640 connector for Sepam B21, B22 and the additional voltage inputs
for Sepam B83
The table below presents the different connection possibilities for voltage transformers
to Sepam.
Sepam
Sepam
Sepam
B21 and B22 Series 40
Series 80
Number of voltage
inputs
Intermediate
connector
Sepam connector
4
3
4 main
4 additional (1)
CCT640
-
-
CCT640
B
E
E
B2
(1) Sepam B83 only.
When voltage transformers are connected directly to the E connector on Sepam, four
transformers built into the Sepam base unit ensure matching and isolation between the
VTs and the Sepam input circuits.
When voltage transformers are connected via the CCT640 connector, the four
transformers for matching and isolation between the VTs and the Sepam input circuits
are contained in the CCT640.
182
Sensors
1A/5A Current Transformers
Function
120R302
Sepam can be connected to any standard 1A or 5A current transformer.
Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents
from 50 A to 2500 A. Consult a representative for more information.
Sizing Current Transformers
Current transformers are sized so as not to be saturated by the current values they are
required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).
ANSI current transformer.
For Overcurrent Protection Functions
b with DT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the
setting
b with IDMT tripping curve: the saturation current must be 1.5 times greater than the
highest working value on the curve.
Practical solution when there is no information on the settings
Rated Secondary
Current (IN)
1A
5A
Accuracy
Burden
2.5 VA
7.5 VA
Accuracy
Class
5P 20
5P 20
CT Secondary
Resistance RCT
Wiring
Resistance Rf
<3Ω
< 0.2 Ω
< 0.075 Ω
< 0.075 Ω
183
4
1A/5A Current Transformers
Sensors
DE80051
CCA630/CCA634 Connector
a
b
c
Function
Ia
Ib
Ic
The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
connector on the rear panel of Sepam:
b The CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam
b The CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a
residual current transformer to Sepam
The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through
primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1A or 5A
circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents. The connectors
can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT
secondary circuit.
a
DE80059
4
b
c
DANGER
CCA634
Ia
Ib
Ic
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
b Apply appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) and follow safe
electrical work practices. In the USA, see NFPA 70E
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device
b NEVER work alone.
b Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance of this
equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume all circuits are
live until they have been completely de-energized, tested, and tagged. Pay
particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources
of power, including the possibility of backfeeding
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off
b To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit, unplug the CCA630 or CCA634
connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and
CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary
circuits
b Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634
connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
184
1A/5A Current Transformers
Sensors
Connecting and Assembling the CCA630 Connector
Connecting and Assembling the CCA634 Connector
DE80069
DE80068
MT10490
1. Open the two side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can
be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced
after wiring.
2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is
supplied with the CCA630.
3. Connect the wires using 0.16 in (4 mm) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
six screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of AWG 16-10 (1.5 to 6
mm²).
4. Close the side shields.
5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ).
6. Tighten the two CCA630 connector fastening screws on the Sepam rear panel.
Bridging of terminals
1, 2, 3 and 9
Bridging of terminals
1, 2 and 3
1. Open the two side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can
be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced
after wiring.
2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is used
to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture opposite).
3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the CT
secondary.
4. Connect the wires using 0.16 in (4 mm) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
six screws that ensure the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of AWG 16-10 (1.5 to
6 mm²). The wires only exit from the base.
5. Close the side shields.
6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit.
7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector
(principle similar to that of the MES module).
8. Tighten the mounting screw.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION
Sepam Series 20, Sepam Series 40
b Do not connect the connector A residual
current input Ir (terminals 18 and 19) and the
CCA634 residual current input (terminal 9 and
7 or 8) simultaneously.
These two residual current input use the same
Sepam analog channel.
Sepam Series 80
b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and
residual current input Ir on connector E
(terminals 14 and 15) simultaneously.
Even if it is unconnected to a sensor, a CCA634
on connector B1 will disturb input Ir on
connector E.
b Do not use a CCA634 on connector B2 and
residual current input I’r on connector E
(terminals 17 and 18) simultaneously
b Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a
CCA634 on connector B2 will disturb input I’r
on connector E.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
equipment damage.
185
4
LPCT Type Current Sensors
Sensors
Function
PE50031
Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors,
which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard.
The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2,
CLP3, TLP160 and TLP190.
CLP1 LPCT sensor
CCA670/CCA671 Connector
Function
DE51674
4
The three LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear
panel of Sepam.
Connecting fewer than three LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go
into fail-safe position.
The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose,
the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs:
b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam Series 20 and Series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs, for Sepam Series 80
Description
1 Three RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors.
2 Three blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase
current value.
3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 IN values per
position).
4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or
via CCA613).
Rating of CCA670/CCA671 Connectors
CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
b Set the microswitches for the CCA670/
CCA671 connector before commissioning the
device.
b Check that only one microswitch is in position
1 for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no
microswitch is in the center position.
b Check that the microswitch settings on all 3
blocks are identical.
Failure to follow these instructions can cause
incorrect operation.
186
The CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current
IN measured by the LPCT sensors. IN is the current value that corresponds to the rated
secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for IN are (in A): 25, 50, 100, 125,
133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
The selected IN value should be:
b entered as a Sepam general setting
b configured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector
Operating Mode:
1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the “LPCT settings” zone; the
shield protects three blocks of eight microswitches marked L1, L2, L3.
2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to “1” (2 IN values
per microswitch).
b The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected
rated current IN is printed on the connector
b Leave the seven other microswitches set to “0”.
3. Set the other two blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block
and close the shield.
LPCT Type Current Sensors
Test Accessories
Sensors
Accessory Connection Principle
DANGER
4
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it.
Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power
is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DE51675
1 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is
plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
a
b
c
3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of
rated current:
b CCA670: lateral plugs for Sepam Series 20 and Series 40
b CCA671: radial plugs for Sepam Series 80
4 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped
with a 9.84 ft (3-meter) cable to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670/
CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D).
c
5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard
injection box.
b
a
a
b
c
2 Sepam protection unit.
6 Standard injection box.
a
b
c
187
LPCT Type Current Sensors
Test Accessories
Sensors
ACE917 Injection Adapter
in.
(mm)
DE80065
Function
2.76
(70)
10.24
(260)
6.69
(170)
The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection
box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors. The ACE917 adapter is inserted
between:
b The standard injection box
b The LPCT test plug:
v integrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector
v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory
The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter:
b Power supply cable
b 9.84 ft (3-meter) cable to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on
CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.
Characteristics
Power supply
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm
(0.2 x 0.79 in )
115/230 V AC
0.25 A rating
CCA613 Remote Test Plug
DE50564
Function
The CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a
9.84 ft (3-meter) cable to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/
CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.
Dimensions
in.
(mm)
DE80117
DE80045
4
in.
(mm)
Mounting lug
Accessory connection principle
Cable
2.66
(67.5)
2.66
(67.5)
0.51
(13)
1.73
(44)
Front view with cover lifted
in.
(mm)
2.72
(69)
1.81
(46)
Cut-out
188
Right side view
1.97
(50)
3.15
(80)
Sensors
CSH120 and CSH200
Zero Sequence CTs
Function
PE50032
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CTs are for direct
residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter. Due
to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
Characteristics
CSH120
Inner diameter
Weight
Accuracy
Transformation ratio
Maximum permissible current
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
CSH120 and CSH200 zero sequence CTs.
CSH200
4.7 in (120 mm)
7.9 in (200 mm)
1.32 lb (0.6 kg)
3.09 lb (1.4 kg)
±5% at 68°F (20°C)
±6% max. from -13°F to +158°F
(-25°C to 70°C)
1/470
20 kA - 1 s
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
-40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
DE10228
Dimensions
4 horizontal mounting
holes Ø 0.2 in. (5 mm)
Dimensions A
CSH120 (in)
(mm)
CSH200 (in)
(mm)
4.75
(120)
7.87
(200)
4 vertical mounting
holes Ø 0.2 in. (5 mm)
B
D
E
F
H
J
K
L
6.46
(164)
10.1
(256)
1.73
(44)
1.81
(46)
7.48
(190)
10.8
(274)
2.99
(76)
4,72
(120)
1.57
(40)
2.36
(60)
6.54
(166)
10.1
(257)
2.44
(62)
4.09
(104)
1.38
(35)
1.46
(37)
189
4
CSH120 and CSH200
Zero Sequence CTs
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION
OR ARC FLASH
b Only qualified personnel should install this
equipment. Such work should be performed
only after reading this entire set of instructions
and checking the technical characteristics of
the device.
b NEVER work alone.
b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Only CSH120, CSH200 and CSH280 zero
sequence CTs can be used for direct residual
current measurement. Other residual current
sensors require the use of an intermediate
device, CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634.
b Install the zero sequence CTs on insulated
cables.
b Cables with a rated voltage of more than
1000 V must also have a grounded shielding.
Assembly
Group the MV cable (or cables) in the
middle of the zero sequence CT. Use
non-conductive binding to hold the cables.
Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage
cable shielding grounding cables through
the zero sequence CT. See below.
DE51678
DANGER
4
E40465
Sensors
Assembly on MV cables.
Failure to follow these instructions will result
in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION
Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH
zero sequence CTs to ground.
This connection is made in Sepam.
Failure to follow this instruction can cause
Sepam to operate incorrectly.
DE80021
a
b
c
Connection
Connection to Sepam Series 20 and Series 40
To residual current Ir input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam Series 80
b To residual current Ir input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I’r input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section AWG 18 (0.93 mm²)
b Resistance per unit length < 30.5 mΩ/ft (100 mΩ/m)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
b Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam
b Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any
other means.
The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4 Ω
(66 ft maximum for 30.5 mΩ/ft or 20 m maximum for 100 mΩ/m).
190
CSH30
Interposing Ring CT
Sensors
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is
measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
E44717
E40468
Function
Horizontal assembly of
CSH30 interposing ring CT.
Weight
0.265 lb (0.12 kg)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
In vertical or horizontal position
Dimensions
DE80023
Vertical assembly of CSH30
interposing ring CT.
Characteristics
in.
(mm)
0.
(4
2 Ø 0.18
(2 Ø 4.5)
Ø 1.18
(Ø 30)
0.6
(16
1.97
(50)
3.23
(82)
2Ø
(2
0.20
(5)
0.31
(8)
2.36
(60)
1.14
(29)
Connection
The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number of
turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT:
b 5 A rating - 4 turns
b 1 A rating - 2 turns
Connection to 5 A Secondary Circuit
c
PE50033
Connection to 1 A Secondary Circuit
PE50034
b
DE80118
a
Ir
CT 1 A : 2 turns
CT 5 A : 4 turns
1. Plug into the connector.
2. Insert the transformer secondary wire
through the CSH30 interposing ring
CT four times.
1. Plug into the connector.
2. Insert the transformer secondary wire
through the CSH30 interposing ring
CT twice.
Connecting to Sepam Series 20 and Series 40
To residual current Ir input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
b
Connection to Sepam Series 80
b To residual current Ir input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I’r input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
c
DE80119
a
Ia
Ib
Ic
Ir
CT 1 A : 2 turns
CT 5 A : 4 turns
Recommended Cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section AWG 18 (0.93 mm²) (max. AWG 12, 2.5 mm²)
b Resistance per unit length < 30.5 mΩ/ft (100 mΩ/m)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
b Maximum length: 6.6 ft (2 m).
It is essential to install the CSH30 interposing ring CT near Sepam, because the
Sepam - CSH30 link is less than 6.6 ft (2 m) long. Flatten the connection cable against
the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam.
Do not ground the cable by any other means.
191
4
ACE990
Zero Sequence CT Interface
Sensors
Function
PE50037
The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV zero sequence CT with a
ratio of 1/n (50 ≤ n ≤ 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.
Characteristics
Weight
Assembly
Amplitude accuracy
Phase accuracy
Maximum permissible current
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
ACE990 zero sequence CT interface
DE80040
4
in.
(mm)
0.43
(11)
1.97
(50)
1.41 lB (0.64 kg)
Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail
±1%
< 2°
20 kA - 1 s
(on the primary winding of an MV zero
sequence CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not
saturate)
+23°F to +131°F (-5°C to +55°C)
-13°F to +158°F (-25°C to +70°C)
Description and Dimensions
E ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the zero sequence CT.
S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.
1.81 3.90
(46) (99)
0.79
(20)
3.03
(77)
192
0.98
(25)
2.83
(72)
0.43
(11)
ACE990
Zero Sequence CT Interface
Sensors
b
Connection
c
DE51682
a
Sa
Sb
Ir
Connecting a Zero Sequence CT
Only one zero sequence CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface. The secondary
circuit of the MV zero sequence CT is connected to two of the five ACE990 interface
input terminals. To define the two input terminals, it is necessary to know the following:
b Zero sequence CT ratio (1/n)
b Zero sequence CT power
b Close approximation of rated current INr
(INr is a general setting in Sepam and defines the ground fault protection setting
range between 0.1 INr and 15 INr).
The table below can be used to determine:
b The two ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV zero sequence CT
secondary
b The type of residual current sensor to set
b The exact value of the rated residual current INr setting, given by the following
formula: INr = k x number of zero sequence CT turns
with k the factor defined in the table below.
The zero sequence CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for
correct operation: the MV zero sequence CT secondary output terminal S1 must be
connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex).
Example:
Given a zero sequence CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within
a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A.
How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990?
1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current INr (5 A).
2. Calculate the ratio:
approx. INr/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125.
3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to
k = 0.01136.
4. Check the minimum power required for the zero sequence CT:
2 VA zero sequence CT > 0.1 VA V OK.
5. Connect the zero sequence CT secondary to ACE990 input
terminals E2 and E4.
6. Set Sepam up with:
INr = 0.01136 x 400 = 4.5 A.
This value of INr can be used to monitor current between 0.45
A and 67.5 A.
Wiring the MV zero sequence CT secondary circuit:
b S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal
b S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal.
K Value
ACE990 Input
Terminals to be
Connected
Residual Current
Sensor Setting
Min. MV Zero
Sequence CT
Power
0.00578
0.00676
0.00885
0.00909
0.01136
0.01587
0.01667
0.02000
0.02632
0.04000
E1 - E5
E2 - E5
E1 - E4
E3 - E5
E2 - E4
E1 - E3
E4 - E5
E3 - E4
E2 - E3
E1 - E2
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.1 VA
0.2 VA
0.05780
0.06757
0.08850
0.09091
0.11364
0.15873
0.16667
0.20000
0.26316
E1 - E5
E2 - E5
E1 - E4
E3 - E5
E2 - E4
E1 - E3
E4 - E5
E3 - E4
E2 - E3
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
2.5 VA
2.5 VA
3.0 VA
3.0 VA
3.0 VA
4.5 VA
4.5 VA
5.5 VA
7.5 VA
Connection to Sepam Series 20 and Sepam Series 40
To residual current Ir input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam Series 80
b To residual current Ir input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I’r input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended Cables
b Cable between zero sequence CT and ACE990: less than 160 ft (50 m) long
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam,
maximum length 6.6 ft (2 m)
b Cable cross-section between AWG 18 (0.93 mm²) and AWG 12 (2.5 mm²)
b Resistance per unit length less than 30.5 mΩ/ft (100 mΩ/m)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms
Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible
(5.08 in or 2 cm maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector.
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any
other means.
193
4
4
194
Sepam Series 20
Sepam Series 40
Sepam Series 80
Ordering Sepam Relays
Digital Protective Relay
196
Selection Table
197
Application and Accessory Lists
198
Selection Example
199
195
Sepam Series 20, 40, and 80
Digital Protective Relay
Ordering Sepam Relays
Sepam Series 20 Relay Features
20, 40, and 80 Series
The Sepam family of digital protection units, Series 20, 40
and 80, is the newest generation of Sepam relay, a time
tested product with a 20-year worldwide history. Modular
relay design allows quick and easy future upgrades to
communications, digital I/O, analog output or temperature
acquisition. The 64x128 bit, graphic LCD display and
keypad permit basic relay setting of Series 20 and 40
without a PC. Comprehensive self-testing provides
assurance of readiness to protect. The Sepam family also
has exceptional withstand to environmental
electromagnetic disturbances. An optional 128 x 240 LCD
display can show one-line or electrical vectors.
Criteria
Network
structure
Grounding
system
Protection
Selection
Radial
(51, 51N, 46)
Long feeders (67N)
Closed loop
(67N, 67)
Parallel mains [transf]
[sources] (67N, 67)
Sync-check required
(25)(67N, 67)
Solid or low/high
impedance (51N)
Ungrounded or
compensated (67N/NC)
Basic Feeder
[Transf][Motor]
Voltage/frequency
(27/59/81)
ROCOF (81R)
Advanced Fdr/Main[Transf]
[Motor][Gen]
Thermal overload (49)cable
Thermal O/L
(49)- capacitor bank
Differential (87T)
Machine
differential (87M)
Machinetransformer unit differential
I
V, f
I, V, f, P, E
Metering
I, V, V, f, P, E
I, I, V, F, P, E
THD-I, THD-V
<8 RTDs of same type
Temperature
> 8 RTDs (< 16) or 2 types
of RTDs
< 10 I / 8 O
I/Os
> 10 I / 8 O and < 42 I / 23 O
Control matrix
Program logic Logic equation editor
customization
Ladder-logic software
1 Modbus port
Modbus
communication 2 Modbus ports
S23 T23 M20 G40 B80 C86
S41
M41
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
S42 T42
G82
S82 T82
G82 B80
•
S23 T23 M20 G40
•
•
•
•
S41 T42 M41 G82
S23 T23 M20 G40
S40 T40 M41 G40 B21
S84
•
B22
•
S41 T82 M81 G82 B83
S81
C86
T87
•
•
•
M88 G88
S23 T23 M20
B21
S40 T40 M41 G40 B80
B83
T87 M87 G87
S80 T81 M81 G82 B80
T23 M20 G40
•
T40 M41 G40
•
T23
T81
T23
T40
T81
T23
T81
M20
M81
M20
M41
M81
M20
M81
G40
G82
G40
G40
G82
G40
G82
B21
B80
B21
B80
B80
B21
B80
Compact standard footprint (< 4”deep) for enhanced
protection of Mains/Feeders, Transformer, Motor, Generator
Applications
Directional overcurrent protection for dual mains and ties and
closed loop feeders
Current and voltage inputs I, V, E, P, PF
Setting software with Boolean logic equation assistance
CT/VT and Trip Circuit supervision
Sixteen seconds of fault recording, last 5 trip reports, and last
200 time-tagged alarms
Rear communication port for interface to optional Modbus®
communications modules
Includes all Series 20 features
Sepam Series 80 Relay Features
•
M87 G87
S23
S80
S23
S40
S80
S23
S80
Backlit LCD graphic bitmap display
Compact standard footprint (< 4”deep) for basic protection of
Mains/Feeders, Transformer, Motor, Bus (Voltage)
Applications
16 inverse time overcurrent characteristic curves
Setting software with offline file creation and
download to relay
Two 86 cycle records of fault recording, last trip fault values,
and last 64 time-tagged alarms retained
Provides trip diagnostic information for analysis of faults
Self-test diagnostic ensures correct operation of relay and
integrity of protection
Wide range of control power inputs
Display operation minimal training required for operation.
Application specific design for Main/Feeder, Transformer,
Motor, Bus (Voltage) zones
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) improved protection
coordination
Rear communication port for interface to optional Modbus
communications modules, plus dual port module, opt
protocols DNP3 and IEC60870-5-103, and also F/O
Modular architecture
Breaker diagnostics
Sepam Series 40 Relay Features
S42
Note: Units in table depict least complex device types compliant with
criterion.
196
Capacitor Bank
Bus
Generator
Motor
Quick Select Guide
Feeder or main
(Substation)
Table 1:
Transformer
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
Standard footprint for enhanced protection of Mains/Feeders,
Transformer, Motor, Generator, Capacitor, Bus Applications
Differential protection of transformer or machine transformer
units
Differential protection of motors and generators
Protection for mains and ties and important feeders including
pre-programmed transfer schemes
Increased metering capabilities I, V, E, P, PF, THD, vector
diagram
Expanded logic equation capabilities (an option for Logipam
PLC ladder logic)
Setting software with graphical assistance, opt mimic-based
display
Battery backup for historical and fault waveform data
retention, wide range DC control power
Two rear communication interfaces
Includes all Series 20 and Series 40 features
Ordering Sepam Relays
Table 2:
Sepam Series 20, 40, and 80
Selection Table
Series 20/40 Applications
Protection
Application ANSI
Code
S23
S40
S41
S42
T23
T40
T42
M20
M41
G40
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
Phase overcurrenta
Voltage-restrained overcurrent
50/51
50V/51V
50N/51N
Ground fault / Sensitive ground faulta
50G/51G
Breaker failure
50BF
Negative sequence / unbalance
46
Directional phase overcurrenta
67
Directional ground faulta
67N/67NC
Directional active overpower
32P
Directional reactive overpower
32Q/40
Thermal overloada
49RMS
Phase undercurrent
37
Excessive starting time, locked rotor
48/51LR/14
Starts per hour
66
Positive sequence undervoltage
27D/47
Positive sequence undervoltage
27D
Remanent undervoltage
27R
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
27
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
27S
Undervoltagec
27/27S
Overvoltagec
59
Neutral voltage displacement
59N
Negative sequence overvoltage
47
Overfrequency
81H
Underfrequency
81L
Rate of change of frequency
81R
Recloser (4 cycles)
79
Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)
38/49T
Thermostat / Buchholz
26/63
Note: Numerals in table indicate number of protection setpoints
a
Protection functions with 2 groups of settings
b
Requires MES120 I/O module
c
Requires MET1482 RTD Input module
d
Requires MCS025 synch check module
e
Option
Table 3:
2
1
2
2
2
B21
5
1
1
2
2
1
e
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
4
e
e
e
2
2
2
1
2
4
e
e
2
2
2
1
2
4
e
e
2
2
2
1
2
4
e
e
e
B22
2
2
2
1
2
4
e
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
e
Series 80 Applications
Protection
Phase overcurrenta
Ground fault / Sensitive ground faulta
Breaker failure
Negative sequence / unbalance
Thermal overload for cables
Thermal overload for machinesa
Thermal overload for capacitors
Capacitor bank unbalance
Restricted ground fault
Two-winding transformer differential
Machine differential
Directional phase overcurrenta
Directional ground faulta
Directional active overpower
Directional reactive overpower
Directional active underpower
Phase undercurrent
Excessive starting time, locked rotor
Starts per hour
Field loss (underimpedance)
Pole slip
Overspeed (2 set points)b
Underspeed (2 set points)b
Voltage-restrained overcurrent
Underimpedance
Inadvertent energization
Third harmonic undervoltage/100% stator ground fault
Overfluxing (V / Hz)
Positive sequence undervoltage
Remanent undervoltage
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
Neutral voltage displacement
Negative sequence overvoltage
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
Rate of change of frequency
Recloser (4 cycles)b
Thermostat / Buchholzb
Temperature monitoring (16 RTDs)c
Synchronism-checkd
Application
ANSI Code
50/51
50N/51N
50G/51G
50BF
46
49RMS
49RMS
49RMS
51C
64REF
87T
87M
67
67N/67NC
32P
32Q
37P
37
48/51LR
66
40
78PS
12
14
50V/51V
21B
50/27
27TN/64G2/64G
24
27D
27R
27
59
59N
47
81H
81L
81R
79
26/63
38/49T
25
S80
S81
S82
S84
T81
T82
T87
M81
M87
M88
G82
G87
G88
B80
B83
C86
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
e
e
1
1
1
1
1
e
e
1
1
1
1
1
e
e
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
e
e
e
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
2
e
e
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
e
e
e
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
e
e
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
e
e
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
2
2
2
1
1
1
e
e
1
1
e
e
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
e
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
e
e
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
4
e
197
Ordering Sepam Relays
5
Table 4:
Sepam Series 20, 40 and 80
Application and Accessory Lists
Application List by Catalog Number
Model
Application
Catalog No.
S80 - Substation/feeder [current & voltage]
SQ1S80Aa
S81 - Substation/feeder [directional grd O/C]
SQ1S81A
S82 - Substation/feeder [directional ph & grd O/C]
SQ1S82A
S84 - Substation/main [separation/ load shed]
SQ1S84A
T81 - Transformer [current & voltage]
SQ1T81A
T82 - Transformer [Dir. Ph & Grd O/C]
SQ1T82A
T87 - Transformer [Diff.-2 wdg)
SQ1T87A
M81- Motor [Dir. Grd O/C]
SQ1M81A
Series 80 M87- Motor [Mach. Diff.]
SQ1M87A
M88 - Motor [Transf. Diff.]
SQ1M88A
G82 - Generator [Dir. Watt & Var, Volt-Restr O/C]
SQ1G82A
G87 - Generator [Mach diff]
SQ1G87A
G88 - Generator [Transf diff]
SQ1G88A
B80 - Bus [Main+1ph volt]
SQ1B80A
B83 - Bus [Tie +3ph volt]
SQ1B83A
C86 - Capacitor [4 step 2xWye banks]
SQ1C86A
a
Replace “A” suffix with “P” to select the “Pro” version mimic display.
Table 5:
Digital I/O Module
Communication I/Fb Module
Analog I/O module
Analog I/O Cables
Ground Sensor CTs (mV out)
Configure softwarec
Selected sparesd
Series
20/40
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
198
Series 40
Series 20
Application
S40 - Substation/feeder [current & voltage]
S41 - Substation/feeder [directional grd O/C]
S42 - Substation/feeder [directional ph & grd O/C]
T40 - Transformer [current & voltage]
T42 - Transformer [Dir. Ph & Grd O/C]
M41 - Motor [Dir. Grd O/C]
G40 - Generator [Dir. Real & Reac Power, Volt-Restr O/C]
Catalog No.
SQ1S40A
SQ1S41A
SQ1S42A
SQ T40A
SQ1T42A
SQ1M41A
SQ1G40A
S23 - Substation/feeder [breaker failure]
T23 - Transformer [breaker failure]
M20 - Motor
B21 - Bus (Voltage/Freq)
B22 - Loss of Mains (Voltage/Freq/ROCOF)
SQ1S23A
SQ1T23A
SQ1M20A
SQ1B21A
SQ1B22A
Series 20+40+80 Accessory List
Accessory Type
b
c
d
Model
Series
80
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Catalog No.
Description
MES120
MES120G
MES120H
MES114
MES114E
MES114F
ACE959
ACE9492
ACE937
ACE969TP
ACE969FO
MCS025
MET1482
MSA141
DSM303
SFT080
AMT840
CCA770
CCA772
CCA774
CSH30
CSH120
CSH200
ACE990
14 inputs + 6 outputs / 24-250Vdc
14 inputs + 6 outputs / 220-250Vdc/hi p.u.
14 inputs + 6 outputs / 110-125 Vdc/hi p.u.
10 Input / 4 output module
10 inputs + 4 outputs 110/125V
10 inputs + 4 outputs 220/250V
RS485 4-wire Interface Module (requires. ext. 24VDC control pwr)
RS485 2-wire Interface Module (requires. ext. 24VDC control pwr)
Fiber optic Interface Module
(2)RS485 2wire I/F
(1) RS485 2wire + (1) F/O I/F
Synch check module (includes cable CCA785)
8 temperature sensor input module
Analog output module
Remote advanced MMI (requires cable CCA77x see below)
Logipam plc logic software
Assembly plate for surface mounting of MCS module
2ft cable from remote display to base unit
2m cable from remote display to base unit
4m cable from remote display to base unit
Interposing window CT for Residual current input
Ground Sensor CT - 120 mm window
Ground Sensor CT - 200 mm window
Aux. CT for Ground Sensor CT Ratio Adjustment (for retrofit)
SFT2841KIT
2640KIT
CCA634
CCT640
CCA612
CCA783
CCA785
CCA670
CCA671
Setting/operating software kit (including SFT2826 osc s/w+CCA783 cable)
Terminal blocks for MES modules
1 or 5 A CT Current Connector
Voltage Connector
Cable for communication module to relay connection
Cable for pc to relay connection
MCS025 cable
LPCT Current Connector
LPCT Current Connector
Includes CCA612 cable to relay rear port
One s/w kit required per Series 80 order and recommended per Series 40/20 order
To be ordered as spare or replacement
Ordering Sepam Relays
Sepam Series 20, 40 and 80
Selection Example
5
Series 20 and Series 40
Series 80
Table 6:
Selection Example
Follow these steps:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Selection Sequence
Select from Table 4 per system, features Table 1 & 2/3
Spare by application
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Select from Table 5 (as required)
Example:
Type Part
Relay unit
Memory module
Digital I/O
Communication module
RTD Input
Analog output
Sync check (25) module
Config S/W
Cable for RTD I/F Modulle
QTY
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
Catalog No.
SP1T87A
MMS020xxx
MES120
ACE959
MET1482
MSA141
MCS025
SFT2841KIT
CCA772
Description
T87- Transformer [Diff.-2 wdg)
Spare memory module
14 inputs + 6 outputs / 24-250Vdc
RS485 4-wire Interface Module l
8 temperature sensor input module
Analog output module (1 channel)
Synch check module (includes cable CCA785)
Setting / operating software kit
2m cable from remote display to base unit
199
Document#3000CT07018/07 August 2007
As standards, specifications and designs develop from time, always ask for confirmation of the information given in
this publication. Square D, ION, ION Enterprise, MeterM@il and Modbus are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric or its affiliates. Other marks used herein may be the property of their respective owners.
08-2007
© 2007 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric - North American Operating Division
295 Tech Park Drive
LaVergne, TN 37086
Ph: 866-466-7627
Square D.com
Powerlogic.com